This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
LATIN SUFFIXES.
BY
THE REV. JOHN T. WHITE, M.A.
OF 0. C. C. OXFOBD :
FIBST MiLSTXB OF THB LATIK SCHOOL, CHBIST*8 HOSPITAL.
LONDON
LONGMAN, BROWN, GREEN, LONGMANS, AND ROBERTS.
1858
Digitized by
Google
1 fr g- 6 . 1'Vui/c • . 5~
Wmal (sUfm^C 7Uu»L'
nuxni) BT epomswooDV ahb co.
BXW-flTUST BqUAJIX.^
Digitized by
Google
PREFACE.
Fqb the full understanding of a language three things are
essentially necessary : — a knowledge of its inflections^ a
knowledge of its construction, a knowledge of its words.
These may be respectively termed inflection-knowledge,
construction-knowledge, word-knowledge; and it is in
proportion as these are attained that a language is more
or less understood. Inflection-knowledge and construc-
tion-knowledge present neither numerous nor grave diffi-
culties. The whole of the inflections of a language are
reducible to one or other of a not large number of given
forms ; and all that is needful for the understanding of its
general' construction is comprised within comparatively
few rules.- But the case is different with regard to word-
knowledge. Each word of the whole language has to be
separately stored in the memory, without any aid from clas-
sification, as in the case of inflection and of construction.
So that as words are very numerous, there is least assist-
ance where there is most difficulty.
To facilitate the acquirement of an intimate and philo-
sophical word-knowledge of the Latin language is the
object of the present work. I have written it for the use
neither of beginners and quite young persons on the one
hand, nor merely of. more or less advanced students on the
other ; but of all who, possessing a moderate acquaint-
ance with Latin, are prepared to bring reflecting minds to
A2
Digitized by
Google
IV PKEFACB.
the investigation of its statements. The principles enun-
ciated in it — ^bome out by Bopp and Pott — even if known
to scholars, have certainly never yet appeared either collec-
tively, or in the present form. Indeed, there is much about
them which is, I believe, altogether new. But though
this IS the case, they are not advanced as mere theory.
They have been subjected to a test severe in its nature,
and continued in its duration, having been employed by
me in writing the Latin-English Dictionary, on which I
have been engaged for several years, and which is now
drawing towards comjdetion. By this means I have
arrived in my own mind at a conviction of their truth ;
and if they be founded on truth, it will be conceded, I
think, that they are most important. Without, however,
entering into any detail of the general plan upon which
the Dictionary is being written, I would state, that while
by their aid I have been enabled to throw much ety-
mological light on numerous words either unexplained, or
wrongly explained, by lexicographers in general, every
fresh day*s experience adds to the proof of their sound-
ness ; and that, while I have occasionally found, and may
still find, cause for a further development of them, I
have never yet, in any instance, had occasion either to
retract or to modify them.
The way in which I have endeavoured to carry
out my ol^ct of facilitating the acquirement of a
word-knowledge of the Latin language, has been by
reducing its words to certain classes, within one or other
of which nearly all that have come dawn to us find a
place. Some few exceptions occur. But it is not diflS-
eult to assign the reason. Tlie Latin language, as we
have it, is not a whole. It is but a fragment. We have,
if a large portion, still, only a portion of it. And, there-
Digitized by
Google
P&EFACE. V
fore^ we do not find in the works of the Latin authors that
have reached us all the words employed by those who
spoke the Latin tongue. Neither are all its Boots cer-
tainly known at present. Hence there occasionally oc-
curs a gap in the process of the formation of words;
— and conjecture, though usually, based on good and
sufficient grounds, has sometimes to take the place of ab-
solute certainty. But the occasions are rare when this
is the case. Almost every Latin word can be assigned a
place in a particular class. And it is by this classification
that a word-knowledge of Latin may be attained in a
comparatively short time, and with comparatively little
diflSculty.
But to enter more into detail. Words consist of two
parts ; — a Base and a Suffix.* These are either attached
immediately to each other, or are united by a Connecting
Vowel.* In the Base is found the Boot*, which shews
whence any given word springs, and what is the notion
at the foundation of it. The Suffix determines what is
the power of the word in relation to its Boot, and in re-
lation also to all those other words which spring either
directly from that Boot, or from other words connected
with it by a second, third, or even fourth formation.*
Boots shew how words primarily differ in notion among
themselves : Suffixes shew in what respect, and to what
extent, they harmonise. In other words. Boots impart
the distinctive, or separate, meaning; Suffixes the common,
or class-, meaning. By the combination of the respective
powers of the Boot (as included in the Base), and of the
Suffix, the true Etymological meaning of a word is ob-
tained. This Etymological meaning in nouns describes,
for the most part, some quality, or power, or characteristic,
* See Definitions, p. 5.
A 3
Digitized by
Google
m PREFACE;
which holds good of a given word ; and which is, furthei*,
a general idea, of which the common acceptation of the
word is usually a restricted, or especial, one. To illustrate
what has been stated. The words mergus and procus are
respectively composed of the Roots (which are, here, the
entire Base) merg. and proc, and of the Suffix us. Merg.
contains in itself the notion of " plunge into water; " proc,
of ** ask : " — while, in each instance, us has a force akin
to a present participle active. Hence the foregoing words
differ as regards the respective Roots merg» and proc:
they agree as regards the common Suffix us. From these
Roots they obtain their distinctive meaning : from their
Suffix their common, or class-, meaning. Combine the
respective powers of these Roots and of their common
Suffix, and their true Etymological meanings are obtained ;
viz. : *^ the one plunging into water" — ^' the one asking."
These meanings describe, here, a characteristic of that
thing and person, of which, and whom, they hold generally
good: the characteristic of the former being, habitually,
^^ plunging into water ; " of the other, '^ asking." Their re-
stricted, or especial meanings, are, " a diver," or ^^ sea-
gull;" — "a wooer" or ** suitor." And hence it may be
added that on the principle of SuflSxes the language
becomes self-interpreting.
Again, as the meaning of every Suffix is settled and
defined, and as it is applicable to every member of its class,
the first intention, or, to speak technically, ** the proper
meaning," of a word is at once discernible. Hence it can
be immediately seen when " the proper meaning " of a
word has, and when it has not, reached us in those works
of Latin authors which we possess. Thus the Suffix tio
contains the notion of "doing" that, which its Root, as
comprised in its Base, denotes;— and from the two, com-
Digitized by
Google
PEEPACE. Vll
bined, are obtained abstract substanliveB ; as^ audt-tio, " a
hearing ; " lec-tioy a " reading ; " and hence it would be ex-
pected that comd'-tio would signify *^ a supping," etc. ; but
it has come down to us only in the force of ** a supper-
room," etc.
From what has thus been just stated it follows that, as
it is by the aid of Suffixes **the proper meaning" of a
word is obtained, its derived — ^that is its **metonymical,'* or
** figurative" — meanings, if any attach to it, are readily dis-
covered. Thus auditio sometimes means ^'a thing heard,"
" a lesson," etc. ; lectioy sometimes, " a thing read ; " and
coenatio, always, " a supper-room," etc. ; all of which are
tnetonymical meanings. Again ; as jugum denotes ** a
yoke " made of some substance ; so, when it signifies *^ the
yoke" either of slavery, or of matrimony, — which is not
a substance, — it has a figurative meaning.
Another valuable result obtained from the knowledge
of Suffixes is the proof that some words, of which, apart
from this system of study, it can only be affirmed that
they consist of the same letters arranged in the same
order, possess a community of Etymological idea, though
they represent objects in themselves entirely unconnected.
Take for instance luma, which means, 1. *^a thorn:"
— 2. "a cloak." What these have in common is not
readily apparent. They have, however, a common Koot,
luy "to rend" or "cut;" and a common Suffix, ma,
which imparts a participial force, either active or passive.
Hence, is obtained, 1. " The rending " or " cutting
thing;" "a thorn." 2. "The rent" or "cut thing;"
I. e. " a square " piece of cloth rent or cut off from a
larger piece and used as a "cloak," " luma, saffum qua*
drum;^ Gloss. Isid.
Again, there are other words, apparently identical in
▲ 4
Digitized by
Google
Tiii PREFACE,
origin^ which come, however^ from different Boots, either
with the same, or with different, Suffixes. Take for
instance, limus, "mud:" limusy ^* a girdle, etc., worn by
sacrificing priests." Here the Roots are different, the
Suffix is the same. Limus, " mud," is from the Sanscrit
Koot liy ^^ to make liquid : " the Suffix is mus^ and has
here a passive participial force. Hence, li-mus, etymo-
logically, means, " the thing made liquid;" t. e. " mud,"
** slime," etc Limusy " a girdle, etc," is from the Boot
%, whence is formed Uff-^g **to bind;" the Suffix is tntis,
and is here used in an active participial force ; the last
consonant of lig, the Base of the word, is thrown out
before the Suffix beginning with a consonantj hence liff-
Witt*, li-musy "the binding" or " festening thing;" "a
girdle." Take again lucas, "a grove;" and lucusy
^* light," the obsolete form, whence comes the ablative
hicuy used by Terence, Here Boots and Suffixes are
both different. Lucas ^ " light," is obtained by adding the
Suffix iLs to the root luc. It means, etymologically, " th^
shining thing," i. e. " light." But lueusy " a grove," is
obtained by adding the Suffix cus to the Boot /k, ^^ to cut,"
etc ; its etymological meaning being " the cut thing," i. e,
a place in a wood cut or cleared : " a clearing," as dis-
tinct from a dense wood : for that it is not a wood itself
is shewn by lavy, who says. Book 24, chap, 3X : ^^ lucus
frequenti silvd septus.'*^
- Corresponding modes of treatment elucidate the struc*
ture and Etymological powers of Adjectives, Verbs, and
Adverbs,
But further. The great aid . towards obtaining an aq-
curate knowledge of the quantity of the middle syllables of
words, derivable from the study of Suffixes, must not be
plisiied over imnoticed. Attention to thQ Pefinitions,
Digitized by
Google
FBEFACE. IX
Bules^ and Examples of this work^ will tend greatlj to
impart a correct pronunciation^ and will increase that
knowledge of quaatitj which must ever prove of essential
service^ especially on those occasions when reliance has to
be placed on the memory alone.
From what has been stated it will be seen how greatly the
labour of acquiring a word^knowledge of the language, and
of pronoimcing it correctly, is diminished by this system.
The memory is no longer strained with the effort of at-
tempting to carry with it the force of each separate word.
The Suffix supplies the clas8**meaning : the word stripped
of its Suffix supplies the Base — whether Root or Theme —
which gives the ground-work of the notion : and the two
combined supply a true Etymological definition of the
whole word. Neither does this hold good of what is
termed the classical part of the language alone : — it applies
equally to the Latinity of every age.
As to the value of a sound word-knowledge in reading
Latin authors it is, perhaps, impossible to over-estimate it;
for it leaves the. mind at liberty to concentrate itself on
the statements advanced, and enables it to enter into the
power and propriety of the terms in which the author
clothes his ideas. Those who have at all deviated from
the accustomed course of Latin reading, and have turned
aside from the Classical writings to works in early or late
Latin, such as Plautui on the one hand and TertulKan on
the other;-— or to technical works of any kind in any age,
such as Ccelius Aurelianus^ in medicine ; the Affrimensores,
in land-surveying ; the Scriptares Ret RuttictB, in agricul*
tural matters ; the Corpus Jurisy in law ; or Pliny, in natural
history, — ^know well how often the reader is brought to a
standstill by words seldom, if ever, found elsewhere. I
have mysQlf often experienced this check; and never.
Digitized by
Google
at PREFACE.
formerly, did I take up any author in any of the above
mentioned class of works without feeling convinced that
I should most probably be compelled to refer to a Dic-
tionary, and that, perhaps, to little purpose. All diffi-
culties, however, have vanished since I have mastered
the principles now brought before the reader ; and if at
any time I have been perplexed, it has been, not about
words, but about the author's views arising from some
obscure mode of expression, or from my insufficient
acquaintance with the subject of which he has treated.
But, beyond this, in teaching, no less than in my pri-
vate studies, I have long tested the value of the principles
here set forth. I have found that my pupils readily grasp
and apply them ; taking, at the same time, no small de-
gree of interest in a system of study which commends
itself to them by giving a key to the meaning of each word,
— abridges labour, — ^and, by calling the reasoning powers
into active play, proves of immense advantage, not merely
in the acquisition of Latin, where its success has exceeded
my utmost expectations, but in the pursuit of other
branches of education, also.
In conclusion, I would add, that these principles are not
confined to the Latin Language alone; they are applicable,
as far as I can trace, to all the other Languages of the
Indo-European stem. And I feel justified in stating thus
much, as I have in MS. corresponding works on the
Greek and English Languages, and have made no incon-
siderable progress in the treatment of some other Lan-
guages also. In each instance I have entered fully into
detail, on the same plan as here employed. The result
of my investigations and labours will appear from time
to time as my literary engagements will allow.
J. T. W.
London, July, 1858.
Digitized by
Google
CONTENTS,
Chap. L — Adjectives and Substantives which have a Common Origin
FOR their Suffix.
„ II. — Suffixes belonging to Adjectives aIiOns.
„ III. — Suffixes belonging to Substantives alone.
„ IV. — Suffixes of Verbs.
„ V. — Suffixes of Adverbs.
INDEX.
N.6. — Substantival Suffixes are denoted by the letters m., /., or »., which point
out the gender. Verbal Suffixes are followed by 1, 2» 3, 4» to indicate the conjugation.
Adverbial Suffixes have Adv. After them. Adjectival Suffixes have merely the termU
nations of their several genders.
a, SB,/, and m,
a-cSus, a-cSa, a-cSam
Adverbs
a-go, a-gin-is,/.,
al, ar, Neut Subst,
a-lis, a-le
a-na, a-nas,/
a-neus, a-nSa, a-nSuin
a-nus, a-na, a-nuin
aria, a-rise,/!
a-ris, a-re
a-rium, a-rii, n. .
a-rius, a ria, a-riam
a-rius, a-rii, m.
a-8, a-ti-s
a-s, a-ti-8, m.
a-sco, a-sc€re, 3, .
a-ti-Iis, a-ti-le
a-tim^ Advj, ....
Page
. 19
. 74
. 136
. 115
. 70
. 65
. 50
. 46
. 46
. 69
. 65
, 69
. 65
. 69
52
. 53
127
, 65
141
Page
a-tl-s ft-tlHi
. 52
a-tus, a-ta, a-tum .
. 42
a-x, a-c-is .
. 54
ber, bra« brum .
. 28
ber, br«iv m.
. 29
ber, briSff m.
. 97
bMi8,bMe .
. 74
bra, br-8B,/. .
. 29
bris, bre . .
. 28
brium, br-ii, n.
. 29
brum, br-i, n. .
. 29
billa, buJie, m. and/.
. 29
bulum, bul-i, n. .
. 29
. 77
bns, ba, bnm
• •
. 87
coFf oTAf omm
, ,
. 31
cer, or cris, ere
• •
. 31
oSus, cda* odnm •
• •
. 74
Digitized by
Google
xu
INDEX.
oYnor,oliifijrl,l.
olto, oYtftre, 1. .
cius, cia, cium
CO, care, or cor, cari, 1.
ere, cr-is, «.
onmi, er^U ».
culum, ciil-i, it. .
cil-lus, cii-la, ctUlum .
cuius, ciil-i, in.
onndiis, ennday enndnm
oas, oa, onm
ous, ciy m. .
do, dXn-to,/
dus, da, dum
dus, di, m. .
e, 6, Adv. from A^, in us
Sy Adv, from Adj. in is
€-a-tus, 6-a-ta, 6-a-tum
8-ber or e-bris, l-bre
i-bra, l-br-ae,/ .
e-brum, e-br-i, n. ,
5-bundus, 6-bunda, 6-bunduni
e-do, e-dm-is,yi •
e-lis, e-le .
(el-)Ia, (el-)l8B,/ .
(el-)lum, (el-)li, it.
(el-)lus, (©l-)li, m.
en, inis, nu .
en-sis, en-se
e-nus, e-na, enum.
eo, e-re, 2.
e-r, fa, rum .
e-r, 6-ra, S-rum .
e-r, 6-ri, nt. .
e-r, or ris, re]
er, 6r-is, it. .
€-ris, or e-r, 5-re .
g-ra, g-rae,/
e-r-bus, e-r-ba, e-r-bum
e-r-na, e-r-nae,^; .
e»r-nus, e-r-na, e^r-num
g-ro, S-rare, 1. . ,
e-r-vA, e-r-v8e,/. •
g-roi^ S-rl, lit. . • •
Page
. 134
, 134.
. 74
. 133
. 32
. 32
. 32
. 57
, 32
. 78
. 54
. 56
. 114
. 40
. 41
. 136
. 137
. 42
. 28
. 29
. 29
. 77
. 114
. 65
. 58
. 58
. 58
. 88
. 80
, 46
. 119
. 34
. 34
. 35
. 38
. Ill
. 38
. 35
. 87
. 50
. 46
. 135
• 23
, 85
es, 1-s, m. and/ .
cs, e-ti-8 or i-ti-s .
e-sco, e-scgre, 3. .
e-sso, e-8s€re, 3. .
e-s-ter, e-s-tr-is .
e-stis, e-ste .
e-s-tra, e-s-tr-e,/
e-s-tris, e-s-tria .
«-tas, e-tat-is,/ .
6-tro, 6-trare, 1. .
e-tum, e-ti, n.
das, to, Siiiii
e-x, i-c-is,y:
ffnns, gna, ffnmn
gro, srxn-is /
ia, 18B,/
i-a-lis, i-a-le
i-bi-lis, i-bi-le
i-bulum, i-biil-i, n.
i-bundos, i-bunda, i-bundum
i-cer (i-crus), i-cra, i-crum
i-cSus, i-cSa, i-cSum
i-cinor, i-cinari, 1.
i-cito, i-citare, 1.
i-cius (i-tius), i-cia, i-cinm
i-co, i-care, 1.
i-ctilnm, i-ciil-i, n.
i-culus, i-ciila, i-culnm
i-culns, i-ciila, i-ciilum, dim,
i-cundns, i-cunda, i-cundum
i-cus, i-ca, i-cum .
i-cus, i-ca, -icum .
i-do, i-din-is,/. .
i-dus, i-da, i-dum
i-ensis, i-ense
Y-es, Adv. .
i-es, i-ei,/ .
i-go, i-gin-is,/ .
i-l-a-go, i-1-a-ginifl,/.
i-l-i-go, i-1-i-ginis,/,
i-lis, i-le
i-Ub i*le
Digitized by
Google
IKDEX
xm
i-lis, i-le . • ,
il-lo, il-Iare, 1.
(il-)lum,(il-)li.n.
(il-)lus, (il-)li, TO.
i-ma, i-msd,/,
l-men, i-min-is, n.
i-mentum, i-menti, it,
i-mas, i-ma, imam
i-mos, i-mi, m.
i-na, i-nsB,/.
i-na, i-nae,/
i»nOp 1-nare, 1. .
i-nus, i-na^ -inum
i-nus, i-nai -I -nam
i-nus, i-ni, m.
i-nus, i-ni, m.
Yo, Sre* 3. .
Yo, Ire, 4. .
10, ion-is, yi
i-o, i-on-is, m,
i-osus, i-osa, i-osnm
to,lHi .
YSfl-s, m. andy^ .
i-s, i-ti-s
i-sco, i-scSre, 3. .
i-sso, i-s86re, 3. .
iBSOylssare, 1. .
issor, issari, 1. dep^
i-tas, i-tat-is,y;
i-ter, Adv, .
i-tia, i-tiaB,yi
i-ties, i-tiei,yi
i-tim, Adv, .
Y-tlmiuiy )
i-tio, i-tion-is,/. .
i-ti-8, i-ti-8 .
i-tims, i- tiva, i-tivum
i-tius (i-cius) i-tia, i-tium
i-to, i-tare, 1.
i-tor, i-tor-is, m. .
i-tro, i-trare, 1. •
i-tudo, i-tud-inifl> Jl
i-tura, i-turse,/.
i-tns, Adv, .
i-tus, i-ta, i-tum .
, ¥-tXma» Y-tlmum
Page
* 65
. 132
. 58
. 58
. 39
. 93
. 93
. 39
. 39
. 50
. 50
. 136
. 46
. 46
. 60
. 50
. 119
. 119
. 97
. 88
. 8a
. 15
. 16
. 52
. 127
. 130
. 131
. 131
. 108
. 138
. 107
. 107
. 141
. 86
. 102
. 52
. 79
. 74
. 124
. 24
. 132
. 108
. 106
. 140
« 42
i-tufl, i-ti, m,
i-tfis, i-tu8» m,
i-tus, i-tuUis,/.
i-vus, i-ra, i-vum
ium, ii, n.
i-x, i-c-is
i-X, 1.0-18
la, 1»,/ .
Latin language, of the
lentils, lenta, lentum
Letter changes
16ns, I5i, m. .
li-go, li-gin-is,/
Uihle
lo, lare, 1. .
Inro, Ii, n. .
Ins, la, Imn
liui»ll, m.
ma,maB,/. .
men,, mln-is» n.
men-tmn, men*ti, n.
mina, minsBjf,
minus* rnXnl^ m.
me* mOn-le, m.
mOnYa* mdnYae,/.
moninm, mdnii, n.
m&lns, mttli» nu
mam» mi, n.
Bftne, ma^ ***"*h •
miui, mft, m.
na, n»,/.
nSuSy nSa, nSum
ns. Adv.
nam, nt, n, •
nns, na, muax
nas,ni»m. .
e, ere, 3*
o, Adv,
e, dn-Lh m*
d-lens, ft-lentis
&-lentus, 5-leBCa,' 5-Ientam
Page
. 41
. 104
. 108
20,22
97, 99, 100
. 84
. 54
. 56
. 35
. 1
. 83
9
. 58
. 115
. 71
. 132
35,58
. 67
35,58
39
93
93
91
91
92
100
100
119
39
39
39
50
46
137
50
46
50
119
137
88
. 83
. 63
Digitized by
Google
Tiir
IND£r.
(ol.)la,(olOlffi,/. . .
Page
. 58
on-ia, on-iae,/. ,
. 88
ti>nus, ti-na, ti-nnm ' .
on-ias, on-ii, m. .
• 88
tX-nns, tV-na, tl-nnm
6n-us, 6n-i, nt.
. 88
tio, tionis,/.
or, dr-is, m.
. Ill
Um,UB.f. . . . .
or, 6r-is, n. . ' ,
. Ill
ti-Tu, ti-TA, tSi^vnat
5sai, GfMki asnm
. 82
tiam, tiiy a. . •
o-x, o-c-is . .
. ,54
tottftre, 1
ra, rae,/. .
ris of o-r, re •
. 35
. 38
tor,t5r-Uhm.
tra,tr-aB,/. . . . .
ris,r-is,/.
rovrSre,!.
Boot without nom. case
, 38
. 135
-ending . 52
tr-is, tr-e . . . .
trix, tr-icig,/ ,
troftrare, 1.
tram, tri, n. • , •
rum, ri, n. . ,
. 35
trus, tr-iis, m. . ,
ms, ra,nim
. 34
tudo, tud-inis,/ .
ruBf rl, m.
r .35
turn, ti, n. . . .
s, Adj.
s« Subst
. . .12
t«&s,ta,tam . . .
. 13
tiira,tiir0Bp/. .
S, ti-s . «
. 52
(ttir)-Xo, (tiir)-Ilpe, 4 .
»a,s8e,/. .
35, 41
tas. Adv. . . .
•eov BoSre, 3.
. 127
tiis,tl,m. . . . .
p-il-lus, s-il-la, s-il-lum
. 57
tiks,tus,m.
sim, Adv, •
, 141
tiis, tiit-is,/. . .
810, sionis,/. ,
Bis, sis,/ .
. . . 102
. 102
ua,iiae,/. , . .
eivus, siva, Eimm .
. 79
u-bris, u-bre . . . .
po, sare, 1. . ,
. 124
ii-cer, or u-cns, u-cre .
por, sor is, m.
. 24
u-cus, u-ca, u-cum
#so, ssSre, 3. .
'. 130
a-cus, ii-ci, m. . .
s-tram, 8-tri, n. .
. 24
u-do, u-din-is,/ . .
guflSxes, Various Verb*
a . .133
ii-go, a-gin-is,/. . .
8US, sa, sum .
. 40
ii-la, ii-l8B,/. . .
„ „ dim, .
8US, si, m. . .
. 35
fills, SUS,»k .
. 104
ii-lens, u-lent-is .
ii-lentus, u-lenta, ii-lentum .
ta, t-8B,/. ; . ' .
. 41, 108
ii-lis. u-le . . . .
tftS,tftt-ifll,/ .
. . . 108
ti-lo,tt-lftre, 1. .
^er, Adv. . .
. . . 138
ii-lor, ii-lari, 1. dep. .
ter,travtnim
. . • 24
ii-lum, ii-li, n. . .
ter, tr-i, nu , .
. . .24
„ „ • dim.
t©r or tr-is, tre .
. . .24
ii-l.us, u-la, ii-lum
ter, tr-is, m. . . -
. 24
Il4u8i u-li, m. . . .
't-Sus, t-Sa, t-8um .
. 81
„ ■ „ ' dim. . . .
«a,4t»,/.
. 107
um, Adv. * . .
Digitized by
Google
INDEX,
XV
um, 1. n.
u-men, u-min-is, «.
ii-men, tl-min-is, n.
ii-mentam, u-menti, n.
ti-mentum, ii-menti, i».
n-mna, u-mnae,/.
n-mnus, u-mni, m,
u-nns, u-ni, m.
tko, HSre, 3.
ti-o, ii-on-is, m.
ur, iir-is, n.
ur, ur-is, n.
u-ris, u-r-is,/.
u-r-nus, u-r-na, u-
ns, a,iim •
ns, 1, m.
19
93
93
93
93
91
91
91
119
88
111
111
38
46
17
19
us, 6-ris, n. ,
US, S-ris, n. •
us, ur-is,/. .
u-tim, Adv, .
U'tus, u-ta, u-tum
iius, iia, ilum
Page
• 111
. Ul
. Ill
. 141
. 42
20,22
Verbs, Denom. Trans, from Subst 120
» ,» » >, Adj. 121
„ M Intrans. „ Subst. 122
« w I, „ Adj. 123
▼uSf ▼»« thiii • 2p
vtiSf ▼!« m 23
X, c-is,/
56
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
LATIN SUFFIXES.
OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE.
Latin belongs to that stem of languages which is called, sometimes
the Japhetic, because of the close affinity existing among the
several languages of Japhet's descendants; sometimes the Indo-
European, from those portions of the world in which the chief
branches of his descendants are located, — viz. India and Europe.
In many respects the Latin exhibits a close resemblance to the
Greek language, especiallj to that most ancient form of it known by
the name of the ^olic Dialect. This arises from the extreme coast
of South Italy having been early colonised by Greeks. To such an
extent indeed did this colonisation prevail, that the district of country
where they settled was called Magna Gracia, It is, therefore, no
matter of wonder that words should be found in the Greek and
Latin languages almost identical: as, Greek, irarifjo, fiiirrip, Xiufy,
yivoQy ^apTTiy flrcVctirt, viwepi : Latin, pater, maters leo, genus, charta,
sindpiy piper. In some words s represents the aspirate of the Greeks :
as, Greek, c£, virip ; Latin, sex, super. Further, v at times repre-
sents in Latin the digamma (f) of the Greeks; i.e. that sound,
something like our v, or perhaps^ which in the earliest period of the
Greek language was pronounced before every syllable beginning with
a vowel ; thus, Greek, ic, ohoc : Latin, vis, vinum. Moreover, in many
words of Greek origin y represents the Greek v : as, Greek, vfipoc,
^Yfxiiv, *0^vff(reve 2 Latin, hymnus. Hymen, Ulysses.
The main cause, however, of the resemblance and connection of the
two languages is their common affinity to the Sanscrit, which is con-
sidered the most ancient of the Indo-European stem. And if this is
B
Digitized by
Google
2 LATIN SUFFIXES.
evident in their Boots, it is no less so in the Suffixes employed in
each of them. The Saffixes of the Latin are alone treated of here.
What has jnst been said respecting the connection of the Latia and
Greek languages with the Sanscrit, is not to be regarded as intending
to conyey the idea, that the ancient Romans and Greeks were ac-
quainted with what is here considered the parent tongue of the
Japhetic race. They knew no more of it, than do the modern
nations of the same wide-spread family. But that connection does
go far to establish this as a fact — that the Japhetic race, wherever
they have gone, have carried with them certain elements of language
which eyidence their mutual relationship, and prove that their several
tongues have all one common origin.
In the following pages Sanscrit and Greek roots are occasionally
given, with the view of elucidating what has been advanced respect-
ing the close connection of Sanscrit and Greek with Latin.
EXPLANATIONS.
S, Sanscrit.
Gr., Greek.
V, Root.
-h, add.
8=s, equal to.
«c., scilicet
obsol., obsolete.
Primitive, the word from which another is obtsdned.
Forms in small capitals, in the formation of words, denote Roots ; as,
AM. root of amo ; fav. root of faveo.
Forms in common Italic, spaced, represent Themes: as, amo, theme of
amo ; amato r^is^ theme of amator,
Latin forms in square brackets, as [defend'ior]^ do not exist ; thej are
given merely to point out the process of formation.
Explanations in English, which show how a Latin word corresponds with
the English term assigned to it, are inserted in square brackets : as, ardlrtm
[the accomplisher of ploughing], plough ; pometum [the thing supplied with
fioiit trees], orchard.
In explanations enclosed in square brackets, [ ], the term " one "
is employed of living beings ; the term *' thing,** of whatever is inanimate.
Digitized by
Google
DEFINITIONS AND BULES.
DEFINITIONS AND RULES.
I. Suffixes'*' are certain etymological elements found at the end of words,
containing in themselves a particular power, which they impart to all words
into the composition of which they enter. Thus, the suffix -t» has a present-
participle power, equivalent to the English 'ing ; and this power is found
in all words formed by means of it : as, parc-t(«, spar-tn^ ; vag-t£5, wander-
ing ; coqu-iw, the cook-ing one, cook ; merg-u«, the plung-ti^ one, sea-gull.
Obt, Suffixes are either Primary or Secondary. Primary Suffixes are
the original or first forms of the Suffixes. Secondary Suffixes are modifications
of the Primary, from which they are obtained by letter-changes, elision, or augmentation.
N.B. In all words capable of inflection, the suffix is that part of the word which alon«
is inflected.
II. Roots are either Primary or Secondary.
1. Primary Roots are parts of language, containing in themselves a
particular meaning, and from which words, as it were, spring up. They are
always monosyllabic : as, am. V of amo ; mom. ^/ of moneo ; kbg. V of
rego; aud. V of audio.
a. Secondary Roots are those which belong to verbs which have been
obtained through composition: as, judic. V of judico ssjus + dico; con-
SEQU. V of conseqvor = con + $equor,
N.B. The meaning of roots, whether primary or secondary, pervades all words formed
from them, or from their derivatives. Thus, the meaning of v ^^' (^> that of
"love*') prevades, (a) words formed immediately from itself, as, am-o, to love; AM-or,
love ; AM-tcM, loving — hence, a friend : (b) words formed from its derivatives, am-
a-toTt lover ; AM-a-<rur, she who loves ; AM-a-^ a loving ; am- a lUKt, lovely ; am-oM/S-
ter, in a loveable manner; AM-ator-cu/tM, a little lover; AM-ic-Y^to, friendship. So
again with ^JUDIO. (judge): judic-o, to judge; JUDic-tum, judgment; judic'V-o/m,
belonging to judgment In the foregoing instances the respective forces of the roots
AM. and juDio. are distinctly traceable.
in. The Theme is that portion of a word which is common to the whole
of it afler the terminations of inflection have been withdrawn.
Themes are either Nominal or Verbal.
1. A Nominal Theme is the Theme of a Noun: i.e. of either a Substan-
tive or an Adjective. Thus, mus is the Theme of the substantive mwa; for
♦ ** Fixed on at the end ; "— firom tuffigo.
B 2
Digitized by
Google
4 LATIN 8UFFIXS8.
it is common to all its cases after the terminatioiis of inflection have been
withdrawn : as, mt^-a, mii«-e, inii«-am, etc. In like manner ban is the theme
of bonus : as, 5an-us, ^oii-a, ^on-um ; 5an-i, ban-n, bamA, etc. (For Verbal
Themes see below.)
The Themes of Substantives are given in the following pages according to
the forms commonly exhibited in Latin Grammars. It must, however, be
remarked, that the usual mode of inflecting substantives is the result of
certain changes and contractions. An explanation of these is now given as
far as they aflect the Genitive case ; for that is all that needs illustration for
the purpose of the present work.
1st Declension.
2nd Declension.
Kom. tnola.
Gen. mola-i,
mola.
Nom. domin5'Sy
dominii-Sy
Gen. domind-iy
dominoiy
3rd Dec
lension.
Nom. torqui-St
Gen. torqui-%'8,
torgu-%8.
Nom. nube-Sy
Gen. nubg-i'S,
ntib'is.
4th Declension.
5th Declension.
Nom. gradu'Sj
Gen. gradU-U,
gradu-8.
Nom. ri'S, Nom. acie'ty
Gen. rH'U Gen. acie-i.
Hence it is seen that a vowel ends the theme of a substantive in each de-
clension — ^viz. a in the 1st declension ; o in the 2nd; fin the 3rd ; u in the
4th ; e in the 5th. Moreover, in some forms of the 3rd, e is used for i; and in
some of the 5th, two vowels occur at the end of the theme. In such forma-
tions of the 3rd declension as (frauds) fraus, fraudis ; (duc-s) dux, ducts ;
imbery hnbris, etc., the vowel is dropped from the theme in the nominative
singular.
N.B. 1. Whenever reference is here made to this the original theme of sabstantives,
it is called the ** imcontracted" or ** nnelided** theme.
N.B. 2. The above remarks are equally applicable to adjectives.
2. AVerbal Theme is the Theme of a Verb. It is obtained by adding
to the Boot in'the 1st conjugation, a; in the 2nd, e. Verbs of the third do
not have a vowel added to the root, and hence have no theme, as distinguished
from a root.
VerbalThemes demand particular notice. In the 1st, 2nd, and 4th
conjugations, and also in such verbs of the 3rd conjugation as end in ib,
the terminations of the present tense (of which alone there is now need to
speak) are formed more or less by contraction.
Digitized by
Google
DEFINITIONS AND BULES. 5
The terminations of all the persons of the present tense are exhibited in
any verb of the third conjugation of which the root ends in a consonant or
t«. Thus, reg-o, reg-if, reg-t7; reg-imtM, reg-il^,reg-uii/; flu-o, flu-»f, flu-tY;
flu-imtM, flu-Sif, flu-ttii/.
1.
am-d-o, onto,
am-it-is, asnaSf
am-it-it, canat,
am'H-imut, amamtw,
am'&'ltUf amdtis,
am-H-unt, amant
vtOH'^-it, monet,
moH-if-%mu9f monemui,
mori'S-itis, monetis,
num-ff-unt, monent.
4.
aud-i-it, audit,
aud'iAnuu, audimui,
iwd-X'Xtis, audUU,
and'l-unt
Thus the verbal themes are found to be, in the instances mentioned above,
am-a, mon-e^ aud-t; all with a short final vowel.
N.B. As a root is most easily discoverable from a verb, it is nsual, but merely for the
sake of simplicity and perspicuity, to refer to the verb all words formed from the root
IV. Words are either Simple or Compound.
1. Simple Words are made up of roots and suffixes, as,FAV-or, KOrmen ;
or of themes and suffixes, as, sarri-tor^ vena-bulum. (See also below, Nos*
VI., VII.)
2. Compound Words are explained below at No. XVIII.
V. That part of a word to which the suffix is attached, whether it be
root or theme, is called the Base. The name Base is given to it, as being
the foundation on which the word itself is built up. Thus, fav is the base
o£fav'Or; ag^ of ag-men; sart% of sarrt'tor; vena^ of vendhulum.
N^, 1. The base of simple words remains unchanged throughout the whole of the
process of inflection, except in a few instances of the Perfect Tense, etc., of Verbs, where
reduplication takes place.
N,B, 2. A Simple Base is the base obtained from a simple word. A Compound
Base is the base obtained from a compound word. A Compound Nominal Base is
the base obtained from a compound word, of which the second member is a Noun. A
Compound Verbal Base is the base obtained from a compound word, of which the
second member is a Verb.
VI. Between a base ending in a consonant and a suffix beginning with a
consonant, a vowel is sometimes inserted for the purpose of connecting them
together. This is called a Connecting Vowel: as, lat-i-bidtun ; mon-i-tor.
Vn. For the sake of the sound, a consonant— termed a Euphonic Con-
sonant — is sometimes placed between the base and the suffix, or connecting
vowel and the suffix: as, ItM-trunij mon'S'trum; luC'e'T^na^ hodt-e'r'ntUy
fen-e'S'tra,
Vm. The Connecting Vowel is usually i; as, UO-Ubulum; sometimes v, as,
doC'U'Tnentum ; more rarely e, ta^fen^e'S^tra.
B 3
Digitized by
Google
6 LATIN SUFFIXES.
IX. A long connecting vowel is sometimes found, especially before the
Suffixes ius and turn belonging to adjectives and substantives : as, ans-a-'ius ;
galer-i'ttts ; aat-u-tut ; pom^e-tum. From this remark, however, must be
excluded adverbs in tus, because their suffix has a different origin : ccd-i-tus ;
divin't'ius.
X. The short vowel at the end of verbal themes is made long before a
suffix beginning with a consonant : as, amd^ amdiar; audi, auditor ; flu, flUmen,
XL When a base ending in a consonant is followed immediately by a
suffix beginning with a consonant, the final consonant of the base is fre-
quently thrown out : as, lu-men for luc^men.
Xn. When a base ending in two consonants is followed immediately by a
suffix beginning with a consonant, sometimes the latter of these two conso-
nants is thrown out: as, ffd^men for fulg-men; mr^tor for sarc^tor;
sometimes the former : as, potes-tas for potens'tas ; egestas for egens-tas,
Xm. When a base ending in u is followed immediately by a suffix begin-
ning with a consonant or a single vowel, u remains unchanged, tis^flu'men^
flu-i»dtui hut before a suffix beginning with two vowels u becomes uo, as,
fluv'ius for flu'ius,
XIV. When a base ending in v is followed immediately by a suffix begin-
ning with a consonant, v is usually thrown out, if it be preceded by a vowel :
SLS, fO'inejUum for fov-mentum; but if v be preceded by a consonant it is
changed into u : as, volu^men for volv^men. Before c and t, also, v is changed
into tt, though preceded by a vowel : as, au'ceps for av'Cep8;faU'tor for fav'tor.
XV. A succeeding vowel is sometimes assimilated to a preceding one : as,
seneC'ta for senic'ta ; semeu'tis for semin^tis.
XVI. In words formed from substantives of the 2nd declension, e is some-
times inserted before the final consonant of the base : as, minister'tum for
minisiri'um,
XVII. Usually, a derived word follows the quantity of its primitive: as,
ciV'iles from ciV'is; amlC'itia from dmi-cus. Yet occasional departures from
this rule occur : as, vadium from vad-o : coU^-a from con and leg'O,
XVIU. Compound words are formed by joining together, according to
certain rules, particular portions of simple words, or a complete word and a
particular portion of a word : as, Tum'fragus, part-i'Ceps, pra'Ses,
1 Compound words are, for the most part, obtained from two simple
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
DEFINITIONS AND RULES. 7
words, as in the instances cited above. Very rarely are three simple
words combined together ; yet there are some few combinations of this kind
to be found in the long compound names in the comedies of Plautus.
These, howcTer, are employed for the purpose of amusing the audiences, befbre
which the comedies were acted, by an imitation of foreign nomenclature :
Vanihquidorw^ NugipolyloquideB^ Tedigniloquides^ and others. See Plautus,
Persa, 3, 6, 20 sqq. Cf., also, Comm. ad h. 1.
2L* Some compound words apparently contain the elements of more than
two simple words : as, perinfimnu, commonefado. But, in such cases, a
previous composition has already taken place; and these formations are
to be considered as simple forms employed in new combinations : thus, the
previously mentioned words are to be divided into per-infirmus^ commone-
facio^ not into per-in-Jirmus^ cam'fnane'facio,
3. Compound Words are either Spurious or Genuine.
a. Spurious Compound Words are those of which the separate mem-
bers have, each, a distinct grammatical inflection ; and which, though fre-
quently connected together in writing, are, nevertheless, no less frequently
written as distinct words : as, respuhlica and res publica ; ju^randum and
jus jurandum, A word, even, is occasionally found inserted between the
members, as, rei toHus pubUca, Cic. Fam. 1, 8, 4 ; jurisque jurandi^ Cic. Cael.
22, 54 ; while the very order is found inverted in jurando jursy Plautus,
Pseud. 1, 2, 63. Here, also, must be mentioned words, of which the first
member is grammatically dependent on the latter member ; as, senatus'
^onsuUumy veri'Similis. In each of the foregoing instances, the first member
is a genitive case depending on the latter member, and always remaining
unchanged in inflection.
b. Genuine Compound Words are those of which the last member
alone is inflected.
The first member, or base, of a Grenuine Compound Word may consist of
(l) a Substantive ; (a) an Adjective ; (3) a I^eposition ; (ft) an Adverb ;
(5) an inseparable Particle; (6) a Verb.
N.B, 1. In uniting the base with the second member a connecting vowel is generally,
though not always, employed, when the base ends, and the second member begins,
with a consonant: as, magn-i-hquui, tub-i-cen, part-i-cqM; — prin-cepSiCer-vix^ pul-
cer. But when the second member beeins with a vowel, no connecting vowel is
used : as, maffn-arnmus, grand-avus. Also, when assimilation, elision, or commuta-
tion takes place at the end of a base, no connecting vowel is employed : as, col-Ugo for
con-hgo; ma-vSh * (contracted into malo) for tneig-vSh; eom-pono for con^pono,
KB. 2. In treating of Genuine Compound Words, the Base alone is here analysed.
* In early Latin the verb tnavolo occurs in numerous forms, and is very common
in Plautus.
B 4 '
Digitized by
Google
8 LATIN SUFFIXES,
(1.) Base, a Substantive. Theme of the substantive prefixed to secoDd
member, with or without a connecting Towel.
adi'ifico^to build : odes; ad'htm: md-i'Jico,
parti'cepsy partaking : .pars ; part 'is: part* Uceps,
nau'fragusy shipwrecked : navis ;nav'is: nav-fragus ; wm-fragus,
lapi^^da, stone-cutter : lapis; lapid-is: ...hpid'Ma ; lapircida*,
(2.) Base, an Adject ive. Theme prefixed to second member, with or
without a connecting vowel.
magni'-loqvus^ magniloquent : „.magnus; magU'i: magfi'i'loqtais.
gratX-ficor, to gratify : .gratis; grat^i: grat't-ficor,
grand^cBvus^ of great BQQ : grandis^grand'is: „.,grand'<Bvus.
tnagn'OnimuSy high-minded: ,.,magnus; magn»i: magn^nimus,
(3.) Base, aPreposition. The preposition is either prefixed unchanged ;
as in ab'^o, ad-dico, per-infirrmiSf prtB-nomen^ post-pano, sub~inleUigo : — or,
its last letter is assimilated to the first letter of the second member ; as,
coUUgo for con-ligo ; al^ligo for ad-ligo ; inteUigo for inter4ego : — or com-
mutation takes place in one or more of its letters ; as, au-fiigio for ab^fugio ;
cam'tnisceo for cum'fnisceo ; ccu'tendo for cum'tendo.
N,B, See letter changes at p. 9, sqq.
(4.) Base, an Adverb. The adverb is prefixed immediately to the second
member ; as, befie'fado, hene-volus.
(5.) Base, an Inseparable Particle.
a. Dis remains unaltered before c, q, p^ ty and s with a vowel following ; as,
dis'cedoy dis^quiro, dis'puio, dis^trtbuo, diS'Sentio. The final s is assimilated
to a following y,* as, dif-fero for dis-fero : — is sometimes retained, sometimes
rejected, before/ ; slb^ dis-jicioj dis'jungo ; di-judico, di-jugo : — is changed
into r in dir'imo for diS'Cmo : — before h is unaltered in dis'hiasco; but
changed into r in dir-ibeo for dis-hibeo : — is rejected before s with a consonant
following it ; as, di-sto for dis^sto ; di'Stinguo for dis'Stinguo : and also before
the remaining consonants ; as, di-'bdlo for dis'baio ; di-duco lor dis'dueo ;
di'gero for dis-gero : di^ldbor for dis^labor; di-moveo for dis'tnoveo; di-
numero for dis'numero ; di^rxpio for dis-ripio ; di^veUo for dis^vello,
NJB. Except in dirimo (see above) this particle is not used before a vowel.
b. Re, in present tense of verbs, remains unchanged before consonants ;
as, rc-cttfo, rc'/ero, rc'linquo : — becomes red before vowels ; as, red'OrgWy
red-eo, red-igo, red»undo : — in some perfect tenses of compound verbs takes
Digitized by
Google
DEFINITIONS AND RULES. 9
the first letter of the perfect of the simple verbs ; as ret'tuU and re'ivli ;
rep'piUi and re-puli ; rep-peri and re^peri ; ret'tudi and rc'tudi,
c. Se remains unchanged before consonants ; as, se'dudoy se-grego, se^
jungo : — occurs (with the addition of d) before a vowel only once ; in
sed^iiio*
d. Ve is found only before consonants ; as, ve-cors^ ve^grandie, ve-paUidus,
e. In = non (only before substantives, adjectives, and participial adjectives)
has its final letter changed into m before h and />; as, irH'herJns for in'herhis ;
im-par for in-par: — is assimilated to a following/, w, or r; as, il-lecttu for
in-lectus ; im-mitis for in-mitie ; ir-reparahilis for in-reparabilis»
(6.) Ba8e,ayerb. This occurs only when the second member is facto ;
the base being in each instance the root of a verb, with a short ^ as con-
necting vowel; as, are^facio; areo^ ▲&., ar-e'/acio: cale-Jacio, caleo, cal.,
caUe-facio: coruue-facio ; constiesco, coNsn., conBU'e-faeio,
c. The second member of a Grenuine Compound word determines to
what part of speech the whole word belongs.
The second member is subject to all the rules of formation by Sufiixes, in
the same way as simple words are ; while in some instances it further under-
goes such letter changes as are given immediately below, and which are more
or less developed in the several chapters on the suffixes.
LETTER CHANGES
OCCURBING IN THE FORMATION OP WORDS.
A is interchanged with t ; as, latex for litex. In the second member of
compound words, ft, long by nature, remains unchanged ; as labor ^ dc'ldbor;
fdma^ in-'famU: — ft, long by position, sometimes becomes e ; as, harhcL^ tm-
herbis; aptusy in^eptm; arma^ iU'ermis: sometimes t; as, frangOj per-fringo ;
tangOy con-Hngo : — ft sometimes remains unchanged; as, dmOf ad'omo;
potior^ com'patior; sometimes is changed to f; as, capio^ con^ipio.
M is interchanged with v; as, berbex, vervex :«* becomes J9 before a suffix
beginning with / ; as, scrip-tor for scrib'tor : — at the end of a base, before a
following/, becomes sometimes «,* as, au-fero for ab-fero : sometimes/,* as,
of'fero for ob'fero : sometimes g ; as, sug'gero for svb'gero.
C is interchanged with g: as, Caius^ Oaius ; cycnua^ cygn^; — with K;
as. Calendar Kalenda; — with q^ (sometimes written fully qu); as, seciUuSy
sequtOue; — with t; as, inducue, induJUa; — is also obtamed ftom p; as
oculus from a/ ot.
Digitized by
Google
10 LATIN SUFFIXES.
9 is interchanged with /; as, daenma^ laerima : with r; as, meriiUes for
medidies : with «; as, CkauiiuM, Clauius : with t; as, mendax for m«n/acar .- —
at the end of a base, mostly becomes # before a suffix beginning with f ; as,
defend'triXf defens'trix ; daud-tnanj cknu^rum : — is sometimes assimilated to
the first letter of pronominal suffixes ; as, quip'piam foTqmd'piam ; quic^quam
for quid^quam, — In words compounded with ad^ when the second meoiber
begins with a consonant, d is usually assimilated to such final letter ; as,
CLc^edo for ad-cedo ; txc-cipio for ad'Cipio ; af'fero for ad-fero ; cig^gredior
for ad-gredior ; as'ium for ad'wm : but when the second member begins
with s, followed by a consonant, or with gti, d is sometimes thrown out ; as,
O'Scendo for ad'scendo ; a^sto for ad'Sto ; a^ipergo for ad'spergo ; a-gndius
for ad-gndtus.
■ is interchanged with u ; as, venuS'tus for vener^tus : S is sometimes
changed into d; as, toga for ti^a; pondus for pendus, from pendo. — S
sometimes represents a ,* as, bUo for balo, — In the second member of some
compound words ^ becomes f; as, iu'Spicio from iu'speeio; im-pribno from
im-premo : but usually it remains unchanged ; as, can'ferOj cori'tremo, tn-
gemo.
V. When the second member of compound words b^ins with f, the pre-
ceding letter of the base, if a consonant, b sometimes assimilated to it ; as,
af'fero for ad'fero; qf-fero for ob-fero; ef-fero tor ex-fero; dif'fero for
dii'fero : a preceding ft, however, is changed into » ; as, au^fero for ah^fero :
but a preceding n remains imchanged ; as, tn-^rmtw, in-festus^ in-feUx,
O is interchanged with c : see letter O. See also letters 8, 9. Also g^
at the end of a base, becomes c before a following t, as, rec^tor from reg-tor;
jtmc-tura from jung'tura,
H at the end of a root becomes c before a consonant : as, vec'tis from
VEH. V of veko. So, also, cer-vix (^rzcer^vic-s for cer^veC'S,')
X. ¥ is sometimes interchanged with u; as, opHmus and opiumus ; maximus
and tnaxiimus ; VCbet and lubet ; — with a ; as, latex for litex, — Also i is some-
times changed into e in the second member of a compound word; as, parti^
ceps for parH'Cips ; arti'fex for arti'Jix,
X. See O.
& is interchanged with d: seeD: — with r; as Pa/t7ta and Part/ta.*—
assimilates a preceding n; as, td'lus for un-lus; — a preceding </; as, lapil-lus
for lapid'lus ; — a preceding r ; as, Ubel»lus for liher'lus.
M is interchanged with n; eum'dem^ eundem:-^ia inserted in some
Digitized by
Google
LETTER CHANGES. 11
roots fa forming the present indicative, and tbe tenses springing from it ;
>v/ CUB., cumb-o ; V bup., rump^.
nr becomes m before b or p; im^beUis for in-beUis ; im-par for in^par : — is
assimilated to a succeeding 2, m, or r; U'labor for iri'ldbor; im^mdms for iri'
mdnis ; ir^rmnpo for in-rumpo : — is inserted in some roots in forming the
present indicatiye, and the tenses springing from it ; as, a/ fib., find'O ;
O sometimes becomes u ; as, eqvu8 for eqvos (nom. sing.) : — is interchanged
with an ; as, plaustrvm^ plostrum. See also B.
P is put for 6 before suffixes in t; as, scrip'tor for scrib'tar : — is assi-
milated to a following/; as, of'Jicina for op-ficinoy the syncopated form of
opi'Jicina: — is sometimes inserted between ms and mt; as, nanpn for
sumsi ; sumptus for sumtua.
Q is obtained sometimes from Greek v ; qvinque from frevrt ; eqmu from
tirvog : also from Greek r ; as, que from re,
JL is interchanged with 8 ; as, Furiiu, Fuaiw ; labor, labos; kon&r, honos: —
is assimilated to a following I; peUlicio for per^licio : also to a follpwing s ;
as, dos'suarius for dor-suarius : — is elided in pe^jero for per-jero,
» is inserted at the beginning of some words formed from the Greek, and
commencing with an aspirate ; as, sex from U ; euper from ^irtp : — is inter-
changed with r : see X : — with t ; as, tefuus, ientus ; exptdsor for expultor :
— assimilates a preceding d; as, as'Sum for ad'sum: — a preceding 6; as,
jtU'H for jub'ti ;— a preceding m ; as, pres-ei for preni'si : — a preceding r:
see &: — a following t in suffix ; as, asseS'Sor for asses'tor,
T is interchanged with c,d: see C, B : — is assimilated sometimes to e ;
obseS'Sor for obsee^tor: — tt sometimes becomes ss ; as, mie'Sio for mit-tio,
V. II is interchanged with t; optumiu, opiXmus; camufex^ camtfex : — is
changed into %; exeUium for exsviium : — before a suffix beginning with two
vowels becomes uv; SLsJhtv-iiu for Jlu-ius.
V at the end of a base, is sometimes thrown out before a suffix beginning
with a consonant ; as, fo^menium for fov-mentam : — sometimes is changed
into u ; as, volu'inen for volv-men : au-cepe for av-ceps : — is interchanged
with b : see B.
Z = w, g8, V8 ; sometimes />«, ta : as, nex = neC'S ; rex = reg-s ; nix =
,iv'8 ; proximus for propetmua; nixus for niteus : — is interchanged with m ;
axis, assis ; Ulixes, Ulysses*
T is used for Greek v in some words of Greek origin ; as, pyrum from irvpov.
Digitized by
Google
12
CHAPTER L
ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES WHICH HAVE A COMMON
ORIGIN FOE THEIR SUFFIXES.
I. — s. (NoMNATivB Case-ending.)
A. ADJECTIVES.
1. Adjectives, formed by adding « (a) to Koots, or to Compound Verbal
Bases, haye, etymologically, a participial meaning, closely allied to that of
a present participle ; and, hence, denote a quality, of which the etymological
meaning is descriptive. But adjectives, formed by adding s to (b) Com-
pound Nominal Bases, signify '^ having** that, which is implied by those
bases ; or some quality, of which the etymological meaning is descriptive.
Ob$. If $ can combine with the final consonant of the Base, it is added to it : as,
truc-8, irux ; partiequ; bnt, if it cannot, the final consonant of the Base is thrown out ;
as, ctgfnipcM for capripeds ; nUterieon for nUsericords,
a. TKVC, akin to S. 1 TRUC truc-^=:iruXy [wishing to kill],
V DBUH, to wish Y fierce, savage,
to kill : J
/>ar«, part; Ipari-is 1 [/?arM-cap-«], "I taking a part,
capiOf to taie : J cap J [^part-t-cip-sjy V participating,
part-i-cep'S^ J partaking.
l>. caper, goat ; . . . 1 c a j!i r - 1 1 ... [capr-x-ped's], 1 [having goat's
pesy foot : jped'is J capr-i-pe-Sy J feet], goat-footed.
ndsereovy to pity ; 1 miser \ .. [mwcr-t-cord-«], 1 [having a pi-
ird-is J miser-t'Cor'S l '
cor, heart: Jcord-isj miser-Ucors [^ tying heart],
merciful, com-
passionate.
a« In some few instances the case-ending («) is dropped. (Compare No,
B. 2. below.)
▼iffiiOfto be alert vigil viffUy being alert, watchful.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
Ch. I.]
ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES.
13
3. In some few words t euphonic is added to the Base, as appears from
the oblique cases, though it is not seen in the nominatiye singular. (Com-
pare below, No. B. 3.)
to survive :
}
. SUPERSTA . . . [superstO'^s^ , '
fsupersta-s^f
isupersti", ~
superste-i
to-*], I
surviving.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. Substantives formed by adding the nominative case-ending, «, to Roots
or Compound Verbal Bases, have, etjmologicallj (like Adjectives of this
class), a participial meaning, descriptive of their character ; and signify
either, actively, a person or thing ** doing" something; or, passively, some-
thing '* done : ** or else they have a neuter force, and signify a person or
thing " being** in that condition, etc^ which the primitive denotes.
iV.J9. For the retention or elision of the final consonant of the Base, see above No, A.
06*.
GB grU'Sy [the one calling out " gr "],
crane.
su sU'Sy [the one bringing forth, Le.
prolific one], sow, swine.
PAUC [^fauc'8'\ , 1 [the eating thing],
fauxj J throat.
NEC [nec-s
nex
JUDic r/twfuj-^], 1 [the judging one],
\judix\, V judge. •
judex, J
CER 1 .-^....[c^rwc-*], 1 [the head - carrying
V Icervex^y V thing], neck.
VEcJ cervix, J
voc [yoC'S],'
vox,
DUG [dtiC'S], '
dux,
[the ruling one], king.
to call out "gr":
S. ^/ su,
to bring forth :
FAUC, akin to S.
VBHACy to eat :
neco,
to kiU :
judtco,
to judge :
CER, akin to Gr.
Kap'O, head ;
veho, to carry : ...
voco,
to call :
duco,
to lead :
rego,
to rule :
-5], 1 [the killing thing],
J J death, etc.
REa [reg-s'],
rex,
[the calling thing], voice.
[the leading one],
leader.
The t reappears in the oblique cases.
Digitized by
Google
14
LATIN SUFFIXES.
[Ch. L
NiY, akin to 6r.
v/^-w, to snow :
avis^ bird;
capioy to take :....
fraudoy
to deceive:
floreOy
to bloom :
PET), akin to S.
V^ PAD, to go 2
priBHdeOy
to sit before :
Niv
[mr-«] 1 [the snowing thing],
niXy J snow.
a v-is 1 [av-cop-f J, 1 [the one taking a
CAP J [atf-ct/^«], V bird or birds], bird-
au-cep'S*t J taker^ fowler-
FBAUD [/rawrf-*], 1 [the deceiving thing],
frau'Sy J deceit.
FLOR [yfo»^«]'
PED [p«d-*l
PR£SID [pr«w«/-«],
{^prasi's"
prtBse
thing],
[the going thing]^ foot.
[the blooming
flower.
•A]
[the one sitting be-
fore], a guard ;
alsoy a president.
}LBG [%-«], 1 [the thing read (to the
lexy J people)], bill, law.
1 FRUG LA^'^li 1 [the thing enjoyed]>
J frU'Xy J fruit of the earth.
stipOf I STip stip'S% [the things crowded to-
to crowd together : j gether ; esp. small heaps of
coin, hence]^ money, pay, gift,
etc.
leffOf to read
(to the people)
fruor,
to enjoy :
a. In some Substantives the case-ending («) is dropped ; this especially
takes place in compound words, of which the last member is obtained from
the Root of a Verb.
Mnro, akin to S.
Vhush, to steal:
ttiba, trumpet ; ..
cano, to sound:..
Mtrs musy [the stealing one], mouse.
[ft^-t-caw],"] [the trumpet-sound-
tub-
CAN
J [ft«6-t-ct«], J iug one], trumpet-
tub'uceni^ J er.
tibioy flute ; \tibi'iB \ ,..[/»6t-t-ca»], 1 [the flute-sounding
J [
canoy to sound :... j can
Itib
Itib.
tih'l'
%%'can\y 1 [
i-ca«], I
f-cen§, J
one], flute-player.
* The i reappears in the oblique cases.
t Not found usually in nominative case singular ; but employed by Varro de Lingua
Latina, 5, § 182 ed. MiiUer: " stips, ab oroifi^ fortatsey Graco verbo/^
t In ttmcen, ¥ is a connecting vowel. Moreover, it is to be remarked that in the last
syllable of tubicen, the i, obtained from softening down the a of the root can, reappears
in the oblique cases : ttiifkHn-U, etc.
§ In tUncen, the second t is lengthened by the crasis of the short t of the base -mth
the connecting vowel, short i. Here also, as in tubleen, the t reappears in the oblique
Digitized by
Google
Ch. L] adjectives and substantives. — Is. e. 15
aa, to; 1...ac? 1 [odf-^er], 1 [the things carried to
ffero* to carry : J...GBBJ off-ger, J (a place)], mound, ^rc.
3. T euphonic is added to the hase of some suhstantives (as well as adjec-
tives), as- appears from the oblique cases, though it is not seen in the nomi-
native singular. (Compare above, No, A. 3.)
equiui, horse ; legu-i 1 . . . . [«5'ttt-^«], "j [the horse-going one],
^o, togo: J I J [eguus'], V horseman, rider.
egue-s*, J
peSy foot; Iped'is 1 ...[pec^t-^*],
CO, to go: J I J Ipedi'S'],
pedes*,
cum, together ;.,,,\com 1 [co»lt-^•«],
eo, togo: Ji J \^comi'S]
comes*.
[the foot-going one],
footman ; foot-sol-
dier.
[the one going to-
gether (with ano-
ther)], companion,
comrade.
— .- -1 .
stOy to Stand : jsta J [^aniistas^,
[^antisii'S],
ante, before ; "^aw^-tfl^ [aitM'-«to-^-«],
Iqniistas'],
[^antisii'S],
antistes*.
[the one standing
before (ano-
ther in rank)],
overseer, high-
priesty etc,
S./>«rtt, around :'J/>art 1 ,..[j9artW-«],1 [the thing going
eoy to go :
round :1/>art 1 ...[j^artW-*],*! [the thing going
J- y [partw], j- around], wall of a
J I J \ partes, J house.
II.— A. ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives of this class have, etjmologicallj, a participial gseaning ; and
denote some quality of which the etymological meaning is descfiptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Boot of Verbs ; but to the
Theme of foreign Adjectives, or of Latin Compound Nominal Bases.
06s. The etymological meaning of adjectives in w is mostly active, yet sometimes
passiye, when their primitive is active; and always neater when their primitive is
neater. Bat where tne Saffix is appended to foreign adjectival Bases, or Latin Com-
poond Nominal Bases, the adjective denotes sometimes ** being," sometimes ** having,"
that, which the base implies.
* In each of the above instances marked with an asterisk, the t and e reappear in
the obliqae cases,
t Hence the Greek preposition mps around.
Digitized by
Google
16
LATIN SUFFIXES.
CCh. /.
jvBfOto to join : •
COM, akin to S.
VKAtf^ to love :
brev, akin to Gr.
fipax'VQy short :
leVy akin to Gr.
Xel-f -ocy smooth :
lev, akin to S.
laghut light :
ifiy not;
barboy beard:
iUj not;
arnMy arms :
eXf oat of;
terra, land:
eXf out of;
animay life : ......
unus, one;....
forma, form:.
...juo. jiig-^ [joiningj, continual^ per-
petuaL
'com corn-is, [loving], amiable, courte-
ous.
brev breV'is, [being short], short.
lev lev'is, [being smooth], smooth.
lev lev-is, [being light], light.
tn
barb^iB
\ [in-barb'is'], 1 not having a beard ;
J im-berb'is, J beardless.
in 1 [in-arm-is'], 1 not having arms ;
arm-oruml iu'erm-is, J unarmed.
[«c-ferr-M], 1 [being out of the
ex
terr-fB
ex
anim'€B
Jun-ius
form-'tB
eX'torr-is, J land], banished.
ex-anim-is, [being out of life],
lifeless.
un^t-form-is, having (only) one
form; uniform.
tenu, akin to S.\tenu.
tanu, drawn out : J
tenu-is, [drawn out], thin, fine.
B. SUBSTANTIVES. ^
1. to, 1-s, m. and/. a. Ss, !-•« m. uid/.
Substantives of this class have, etymologicallj, a participial meaning, and
denote some person or thing of which the etymological meaning is descrip-
tive. They signify either, actively, a person or thing " doing " something ; or,
passively, soAiething " done :" or else they have a neuter force, and signify a
person or thing " being *' in that condition, etc., which the primitive denotes.
They are formed by adding tke Suffix to the Boot of Verbs.
X. torreo, to burn :...TORR ^orr-t«, [the burning thing], fire- I
brand.
trudo, to thrust : trud trud-is, [the thrusting thing],
pike, etc,
audio^ to h^9X : aud ,... om^-w], "I [the hearing thing],
aur-is, J ear.
Digitized by
Google
1^ !■■
Ch, I.] ADJECTIYES AND SUBSTANTIVES. — ^iu» a, urn. 17
»f \ TOBQU •« torqu^Uy [the twisted thing],
to twist : J twisted chain or collar.
2. imbOf to cover: ...NUB nub-eSy [the covering thing],
cloud,
ftincfo, to beat :,..^.*Ti33>. ...,.,„. tud-e^y [the beating thing]i
mallet.
veAo, to carry : ,yej>,,.,, veh-es, [the carrying thing],
carriage.
labor, to &\ip: lab •••«.,.... lab-es, [the slipping thing],
earth-slip,
^orcf^o^ to be filthy : S09D sord-es, [the filthy thing], filth,
dirt.
«^a/eo, to be filthy: @QUAL squal-es^ [the filthy thing], filth,
dirt.
»« to breaks KW.. .♦•....... rwp-^*, [the broken thing], ateep
rock, etc.
9truOy to construct: stbit slru-eSy [the constructed thing],
heap, pile.
Obs, The yowel te is employed sometimes after guttural sounds at the dose of a Base
for the purpose of softening the pronunciation of the Suffix ; thus,
anpo, to squeeze: ang,. .,..,,. ,..,., jong-u^k*, [the squeezing one], snak^
III,— -A. ADJECTIVES.
us* a, mil.
Adjectives in us, o, urn, are derived from (1) Verbs, (2) Substantives, (3)
Adverbs.
When derived from Verbs they have a direct participial fotce, generally
active, yet sometimes passive, when the primitive is active; but neuter
when the primitive is neuter. When derived from Substantives they denote,
etymologically, the "having" that which their primitives signify ; from Ad-
verbs the " being in such a condition,** etc., as those adverbs point out ; and
* The appellation is descriptive of the winding folds with which the snake encom-
passes, and squeezes, its victim.
C
Digitized by
Google
18
LATIN 8UFFIXE8.
[Ch. J.
in each of these cases, they point out some quality, of which the etymological
meaning is descriptiye.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Verbs and the
Theme of Substantives ; but to Adrerbs without change in them.
1. solo, to know : sci sct-us, knowing.
vagoTy to wander:. ..TAG vag-uSy wandering.
vivOy to live : viv viv-us, living, alive.
bene, well i ..,.,..,. \bene 1.. benevol-us, wishing well ; bene-
voloy to wish :....•. J vol J volent.
magnusy great ;...lma^n-tl.
/o^ttor, to speak: Jloqu J
ncrvt^, ship; Iwav-w
frangOy to break : J frag
-PAR
ovumy egg;
pariOy to bring
forth:
omniSy all; \omn'is
vagor, to wander : J vag
omniSy all; \omn-i8
vorOy to devour :... j VOR
peSy foot; ^ped'U
sequor, to follow : . J sequ
veruSytrue;
dicoy to point out :
ver'%
Die
magn-i-loqU'Uiy speaking great
things, or in a lofty style ;
magniloquent.
nav-i-frag-usy causing ship-
wreck.
0V'i-par-u$y bringing forth eggs ;
oviparous.
omn~i'Vag-uSy wandering in all
directions.
omn-i-vor-uSy devouring all things ;
omnivorous.
ped'i-seqU'USy 1 following on
ped-i'S'Sequ'USy J foot.
ver'i'diC'USy pointing out what is
true ; speaking the truth ;
truthful.
fldo, to trust : fid fid-usy trusted.
navt^, ship; \naV'is 1.. nau-frag-usy ship -broken; t, c.
frangOy to break : J frag J ship- wrecked.
relinquoy to leave 1 reliqu reltqu-uSy left behind, remaining.
behind : J
a. eanor* melody : can or 'is .. canor-uSy [having melody], melo-
dious.
€fecor, grace: decor^is ,,, decor-usy [having grace], grace-
ful.
honor, honour * .„ honor-is.,. honor-ttSy [having honour],
honourable.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. I.] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIYES. — ii»,l,et<j. 19
lingiila, 1 lingul'ce.. /i«^«/-tt*, [having a little tongue],
little tongue : J somewhat talkative,
ocfor, scent: odor-is odor-uSy [having scent], odor-
ous,
^opor, sleep: sopor'ts,,. sopor-usy [having sleep], sleepy.
3. super, above : super-tiSy [being above], upper,
high, above.
^.B. The adjective interns is not found ; yet it must have existed, as is shewn by the
diminutive form intendusy which occurs in post-class. Latinity.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. nsy t, m, 2. Uf ee* /. and m. 3. um, 1, «•
Substantives in us, a, or um have, etymologically, a participial meaning,
and denote some person or thing, of whom, or which, the etymological mean-
ing is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Yerbs.
Obs. The etymological meaning is sometimes passive, but more commonly active,
when the primitive is active ; but it is neuter when the primitive is neuter.
1. cfiquo, to cook : COQU coqu-uSy [the cooking one], cook.
wt^^o, to plunge Imerg merg-tiSy [the one plunging into
into water: J water], diver; sea-gull.
procoy to ask: proc proc-usy [the asking one], wooer.
sdno, to sound : son son-usy [the sounding thing],
sound.
luceoy to Bhine : LUC luc-tis*, [the shining thing],
light.
S. Vlup, to rend: lup lup-us, [the rending one], wolf.
incuboy to lie upon: incub incub-us, [the thing lying upon],
incubus.
STOft {crTop)y V 1 STOR [*<or-t«], 1 [the thing spread out]
of f^erno, to spread V tor-us^y J couch,
out : J
• Found only in Ablative Case.
\ For the rejection of s compare tono, from the Sanscrit Root ttan, to thunder.
02
Digitized by
Google
20 liATIir BU7FIXES. [Ch. I,
a. AmdOf to hurl :•• .FUND •..•^^» /kiMf^ [the horling tking^*
sling.
nt^y to grind : ifou mdlnt^ [the grinding ^ing], mill
tego, to cover: teg [^«7-o]> 1 [tbe covering thing"], a
tS^-a^f 5- covering; (esp. Boman
J toga).
«crt^, to write :—»».sCBiB scrU^-aij [the writing one],
scribe.
liceOy to offer for 1 Lie ItC'S-a^lix-a'^f [the one offering
sale : J for sale], sutler, etc,
advenio, to come to: abtsk. «•%... 4idven-ay [the one coming to ano-
ther], stranger.
conutro, to live with : CONVIV conviv-ay [the one living with
another], guest.
transfugiOj to flee 1 tbaksfuo.*. transfug-Oj [the one fleeing
across : J across], deserter.
ool=co», with;... 1 co/1 coileg~a^y [the one chosen with
iSffo, to choose:... J leg J another], colleague.
s. junffo 9 to join : .... jtfG ••. ». jug-^m, [the joining thing], ^oke
Tftdo, to go:,,.......TAl> .••.... v^cf-ttm §, [the thing gone
through], ford ; shallow.
IV.— A. ADJECTIVES.
1. vuMf mLf Tiuii. a. ttus, liaf fimii. 3. i-vas« i-va* i-Tiun.
a. Fbom Verbs.
Adjectives of this dass have, etymologically, a participial meaning, either
active, neuter, or passive. Many of them have a force exactly correspond-
• Compare in Greek, ^6po5 from <fr«lp«. Aoyo« from Xryw,
f Scriba and lira are perhaps the only simple masculine substantives of this class :
compare the others above ; also compare, parriddoy parricide ; matricida, matricide ;
caZicif/a, inhabitant of heaven; !egirupa, law-breaker; indighia, native. Masculine
substantives formed immediately from the Greek do not invalidate these remarks, inas-
much as they do not fall under this rule : as, nauta from veturns ; poeta from 99nT^t (for
irwuTflf ) ; in both of which instances ta ■* tus,
t In this word the » is euphonic ; compare ycn-c-»-*m, mon-s-trum, etc., in No. V. B.
§ Compare coUega and v&dum with their respective Bases, and observe how, in each,
the quantity of the vowels e and a differs irom the corresponding vowel in the Base.
Digitized by
Google
CB.L] ADJECTIVES AND 817BSTAVTXYBS. — vu*. va, ▼mn, etc 21
ing to the force of tke ptrticiples of the verhs from which thej are
derived. Others again deaote a quality of which the etjmoh)gical meaning
is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root.
Obs, 1. The Primary Suffix U «ta ; bat after any other consonanta than r and ^
vus ia changed into uus.
Obs, 2. When a consonant precedes r, vus even here becomes uus.
Obs. 3. The adjectiyes mentioned in No, 3 take the Coxmecting Yowel t before the
Suffix.
l.protSro, to tramplel ...PBOTEB ... proter-vus, [trampling down],
down : J oppressive ; wanton*
9roy to plough : *., «,A«..f. ar-vti^ ploughed.
a. aMVOfov to sit by ; Assm assid-uusy [sitting by], con-
stantly at or near*
congruo, to agrees oongr congr-ius, agreeing.
contingOy to touch ; contio . ... con%-ttiM, touching; adjoining.
deeidoy to fall down :...d£CID dedd'uusy falling down; de-
ciduous.
irrigoj to watery ibbig irrig-uus, watering, irrigating.
noceoy to hurt : .noc ndc-uus^ hurting, hurtfuL
occidoy to set: occm occid-HuSy setting.
restdeo^ to remain 1 ...besid resid-uus, [remaining sitting],
sitting : J remaining behind.
vdco, to be empty : vac #• vac^Hus, [being empty], empty.
coBtlnSo, to hold to- 1 ..CONTiN contin-uuSy [held together],
getheri J joined; continuous*
consptctQf to l^hold I ...ooKSPiiC .... conspic-iius, [beheld], visible;
conspicuous.
decidoy to cut down : ....decid decid'UuSf cut down, lopped off.
irrtgoy to water: ibbig irrtg-uttSy watered, irrigated.
perspicioy to see 1 pebspic . . . persptc-uus, [seen through],
through : J transparent.
<», in ; !••»«> 1 ••• ingen-HuSy [brought forth in
^CTW), to bring forth:/ gen J (a place)], indigenous.
9. o&do, to fall: GAD cad't'VUSy falling.
ndceoy to hurt: nog niks-t-vwy hurting, hurtful.
C3
Digitized by
Google
22 LATIN SUFFIXES. ECh. *.
rectdOf to fall back : recid .••• recid-i-vus, falling back.
vacoy to be empty : ••«... yac ••••••• vac-i-vusy being emptj; empty.
b. Fbom Substahtiyes.
Adjectives of this class formed from Substantives, denote the '* belonging
to ** that which their primitives imply.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme.
1. anniUf year : ann-i ann^uus^ [belonging to a yearj,
annud.
biSy twice ; 1 Ins 1 [ft w-^-,t7fw], "1 [belonging to twice
diesyday: J di-e* J Ibi^-vus'], f the day], belong-
bi-d'Uus\f J ing to two days.
tresy three ; 1 tr i - um^ \ ..[^trt-dt-vus^, "1 belonging to three
dieSydKj: J di-e* J [/rt-rf-r«s], j- days.
2. 8estaa» . 1 ces t a t-is ,,.\^tFStdt't-vus'\,\he\ongmg to Bum--
summer: J (Bst-UvuSy J mer.
tempestaSf 1 te mp est a t'isl[tempestat't'Vus'], ^ belonging to (a
season : J tempest-i-vusy > right) season ;
J seasonable.
festuniy festiYal : ,fest4. fest-UvuSy belong to a festival.
furtuniy 1 furt'i furt-x-vuSy belonging to theft ;
theft : J stolen, etc,
sementis, a sowing :„sement-is,. «emenM-rt<^, belonging to sowing.
votUMy Yow : vot'i vot-i-vtiSy belonging to a yo w ;
vowed.
„ wish: „ vot'l'Vtts belonging to a wish;
wished.
• Old Genitive: thus, dte.,.hora8, Virg. G. 1, 208; see Priscian, p. 780, ed. Putsch:
die exiremum. Sail. Jug. 21, 2 : dU vesperj id. ib. 52, 3 : Gellius, also, 9, 14, 8, gives die as
the Genitive of dies,
t Observe in this and the following word the change ofvua into uus,
X Only used as Substantive, in neuter, triduum — the word spaiium being understood.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. L] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTXVES, — ^iru«, ▼!, etc 23
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. iraSf Tlf m. 2. uai u8Bf /. 3. e-r-va* a-r«^8B9 /.
Substantives of this class have, etjmologicallj, a participial meaning.
They denote persons or things of whom, or which, the etymological mean-
ing is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix (a) to the Root of Verbs ; (b) to
the Theme of Substantives, or to Foreign Bases.
Ohs. The etymological meaning is sometimes active, sometimes passive, when the
primitive verb is active ; bat it is neuter when the primitive is neuter. When the
Base is obtained from a noun, the word denotes ** having ** ** belong^g to," or uttering "
that, which the base signifies.
a. From Verbs.
1. alOf to nourish: ....al alvus^ [the nourishing thing],
belly.
clino^ obsolete ; '
akin to Gr. icXtVw,
to incline :
Bi, akin to 'PY,
V' of piuty to flow :
CLIN [^clin-vus'], \ [the inclining thing],
cU'VuSy J sloping or rising
ground.
Ri ri-vus^ [the flowing thing], river,
stream.
2. UnffOf to lick : ling ling-ua^ [the licking thing],
tongue.
stattio, to set up : ...stat stat'ua^ [the thing set up], statue.
b. From Substantives and Foreign Bases.
1. eer, akin to Gr. *
irep-ac, Lat. cornu,
horn :
GOB, the sound
"cor" or "caw:"
eer eer-vus, [the one having horns],
stag.
COR cor-vtiSy [the one uttering the
sound " cor " or ** caw "],
crow, etc.
a. noz«, night : nod -is noct-ua, [the one belonging to
night], night-bird, night-owL
3. mlB, akin to S. "j mm Min-e-r-va*^ [the one having
man-as ; Gr. fxiv- > mind], the goddess Minerva.
o£, mind : J
* Here e is a Connecting Vowel, and r is enphonic, as in he-e-vna, tab^e'r-na, see
below. No. XIII. B.
04
Digitized by
Google
24
LATIN SUFFIXBS.
[CbcI.
v.— A. ADJECTIVES.
1. ter, tra, tmm.
a. ter, or tris, tre.
3. e-s-ter, or e-s-trls* e-s-^tre.
Adjectives in /er, etc., denote, etymologicallj *, either, actively, "accom-
plishing** or "causing ** something, or "by** or "with** something; or, pas-
sively, " accomplished** or "caused by*' something; and hence they point out
a quality, of which the etymological meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Boot of Verbs, or Theme of
Substantives.
Obs. In e-S'ter, e-s-tria, i-s-ter, e and i are Connecting Yoweb, and s is euphonic.
1. teBdeo, tol TIED [t6Bd'ter\, 1 [[causing disgust]^
disgust :
2. pftlUSy
marsh :
3. eampiuh
a plain :
equus,
horse :
lana,
wool :
St/lVOy
wood:
ft. mannsv
hand:
tts-ter.
y
}
-fer, I
'triSy J
noisome^ foul.
causing a marsh],
marshy.
„p a lu d'is ,»,{jpalud-ter\y
palus'i
\_palud-
palus-
.tcamp'i camp-e-S'tery 1 [caused by a
camp-e-s-triSy J plain], level.
.equ-i equ-e-S'tery 1 [caused by a horse],
equ-e-s-triSf J equestrian.
.JaH'a lan-C'S'tris, [caused by wool],
woollen.
,.st/lv'{s sylv-e-S'teVy 1 [caused by a wood],
*,'8-triSy}
si/lv-e-,
wooded ; woody.
}
1. tor, tSr-Ui, m.
2. sor, sor»ts,4».
3. l-^tOTf ¥tdr-ls, m,
ft. tnu, tr-1is, m.
...man-US [»ian-t-*-fer], 1 [[accomplishing
mifi'i'S'tery J with the hand];
serving.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
5. l-t«r, ¥-^tr-ls, m, 9. e««"tra» e-s-tr-flDy/.
6. l-s-ter, 1-s-tr-l, m, lO. tram, tr-t, »,
7. trlx, tr-lols,/. 11. s-tnun, s-tr-1, it.
8. tra, tr-»,/. 12. i-s-tnuii« l^a-^tr-!* if.
Substantives of this class denote, etymologically*, either, actively, " the ac-
complisher of** that which their primitive signifies ; or, passively, " that by
which** whatever is implied by the primitive "is accomplished'* or "caused";
or, reflexively, one, etc,, who " does something for himself,'* etc,
• Sanscrit tar or tri** to accomplish."
Digitized by
Google
Ch. !•] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTAKTIVES. — tor, tdr^4», etc 25
They are principally obtiuned from Verbs, and are formed by adding the
Suffix to the Root or Theme.
Some few are formed from Substantives. See below, Obs, 2.
N.JB, In Aos. 8, 5, 6, 12, t is a Connactiiig ToweL In No, 9 e is a ComiectiBgYowel,
and in No*, 6, 9, 11, 12, s is euphonic.
to love :
jejunoy
to fast :
a ma amd-tort [the accomplisher of loving^
lover.
Jejuna, jejund-tor, [the accomplisher of fasting],
one who fasts.
lego, to
bequeath :
piscary
to fish:
audiOy
to hear :
garrtOy
to chatter:
sarrioy
to hoe :
largior, to
bestow freely: J
faveo^
to favour ;
lego,
to read :
regoy
to rule :
scrihoy
to write :
sarcioy
to patch :
sarrtOy
to hoe :
leg a «... legd-tory [the accomplisher of bequeath-
ing], one who bequeaths.
pi sea.., piscd'toTy [the accomplisher of fishing],
fisherman.
audi^.,* audUtoTy [the accomplisher of hearing],
hearer.
garri... garrx-tory [the accomplisher of chatter-
ing], chatterer.
Jsarri.., sarri-^oTy [the accomplisher of hoeing],
hoer.
"^largi:, largUtory [the accomplisher of bestowing
freely], one who bestows freely.
FAV [yiatr-tor], 1 [the accomplisher of favour-
faU'toTy J ing], favourer.
LEG [/«»^-tor], 1 [the accomplisher of reading],
lec'toTy J reader.
REG [re^-tor], 1 [the accomplisher of ruling],
rec'tovy J ruler.
SCBIB, . . . [scrib'tor]*
scrip-tor,
SARC [*arc-tor] ,
sar'tor.
[the accomplisher of writing],
writer.
[the accomplisher of patch-
ing], patcher ; cobbler.
8ABR ^•.[^sarr-tor^, 1 [the accomplisher of hoeing],
sar-tory J hoer.
2. obsYdfio,
{pby sedeo)y
to besiege :
tondeoy
to shave :
"I oft-SED..[o^«c€f-tor
[obses-
obses-
TOND .
I'torlA
•-tor], J-
f-«or, J
[the accomplisher of besieg-
ing], besieger.
tond'torj,'^ [the accomplisher of shaving],
tons-tor jy I barber.
[tons-sorjy |
ton-sor^ J
Digitized by
Google
26
LATIN SUFFIXES.
tCa. t
expello,
to drive out:
defendoy
to ward off:
EXPUL...[eayM/-torJ, 1 [the accomplisher of expel-
, J
expul'Sor^
DEFEND.. \defend'tor\
yefens-torji
[deferU'Sor],
defensor,
ling], expeller.
fthe accomplisher of
fending]]^ defender.
de-
da ftlVtey
to favour :
moneoy
to advise :
geno,
to beget :
}PAV fav't-tor, [the accomplisher of favouring],
favourer,
HON tnon-t'tory [the accomplisher of advising],
adviser.
GEN gen-t'tor, [the accomplisher of begetting],
begetter.
Obs. 2. Some few substantives of this class are also formed, in imitation of those of
verbal origin, from substantives, bj adding the Suffix to the Theme, (a) with a as a
Connecting Vowel, so as to resemble substantives formed from the first conjugation ;
(b) with, or without, i as a Connecting Vowel, so as to resemble some of the substantives
formed from the second and third conjugations.
a. »gnexy old man: sSn-is: sen-a-tor, senator.
b. oZtvo, olive-tree : oHv-cb: o^v-l-tor, olive-dresser«
tanua, house-door : jdnu-a: t J^'***"*'"**] I rwYw^r
janitor, ) Por«^-
o/tw, garden herbs: dlSr-U: [^/^r-f-tor], ) kitchen gar-
ol'i'tor*, j dener.
ft. tdno, Iton tan-t'trus, [the accomplisher of thunder-
to thunder : J ing], thunder.
5. aocipio. 1 ACCiP accip-t-ter, [the accomplisher of taking to
to take to j- self, or seizing], bird of prey ; esp. a
one's self : J hawk.
6. MAO. akin 1 mag {^mag-i'S-ter'], [he who makes himself
^ venerated], master.
. MAO. akini :
to S. v^ I
MA. t, to j
venerate : J
7. amOf
to love :
judtco,
to judge:
la ma ama-trix, [the accomplisher of loving],
J female lover.
^judtca.judtcd'trixy [the accomplisher of judging],
J female j udge.
* Compare Sp^fex from dpifrYex,
t Also, to increase, erescere.
Digitized by
Google
CJh. 1] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES. — tor, tdr-la, etc. 27
ptscory
to fish :
faveoy
to favour :
defendoy
to ward off:
eacpello,
to drive out :
tondeoy
to shave :
moneo,
to advise :
pisca... pisca-irix, [the accomplisher of fishing],
female fisher.
PAV [JaV'triXy'],! [the accomplisher of favour-
fau-irix, J ing], she who favours.
[^defend'trix'], 1 [the accomplisher of ward-
defens'trixy J ing off], female defender.
, expul'trix, [the accomplisher of driving
out], female expeller.
TOND [tond'trix^, \[the accomplisher. of shav-
tons'trixy J ing], female barber.
MON mon-i-trixy [the accomplisher of advis-
ing], monitress.
DEFEND.,
EXPUL
06s. 3. Some feminine sabstantives in trix are formed from Babstantives. Compare
above, Obs. 2.
janOa, gate : ,
..janu'ce...lJanu'trix'], \ she who keeps the gate.
janl'trixy }
to milk :
fulgeoy
to flash :
....MULG ....[m«/^-/ra], 1 [that by which milking is
mulc'tra, J accomplished], milk-pail.
„..fulge ... fulge-tray [the accomplisher of flashing],
lightning.
9. raw, akin to Gr.^ AN, 1 fen . •• • fen-e-s-tra, [the accomplisher of
^ of 0aiV(ii, to show : J showing], window.
XO. aro,
to plough:
fulgeOy
to flash :
claudoy
to close :
rddoy
to scratch :
rodoy
to gnaw :
ruoy to
throw up :
specwy
to look:
video,
to see i
}
.*.ara ara-trum, [the accomplisher of plough-
ing], plough.
^.fulge... fulge-trutn, [the accomplisher of flashing],
lightning.
„.CLAjn>....[claud'trum']i\[the accomplisher of clos-
claus-trumy J ing], bolt ; bar; etc.
...BAD [rarf-^rttw], I [the accomplisher of scratch-
ras'trumy J ing], rake.
...ROD [rarf-^rwi»], 1 [the accomplisher of gnaw-
roS'trumy J ing], snout; beak.
...r« ru-iruniy [the accomplisher of throwing
up], spade.
...SPEC spec'truniy [that bj which looking is
caused], apparition ; spectre.
VTD [rW-/rtii»], 1 [that by which seeing is ac*
vi'trum, J complished], glass.
Digitized by
Google
VI.— A. ADJECTIVES.
1. bePf brat bmnu ' 3. S-ber* or, llbrls« S-bre.
a. brtflt br«« Ik* ^brt«i C*br««
Adjectives in her^ etc., have, etymologicallj, a participial meanings and
denote some quality of which the etjmoloj^ical meaning is deacriptive. From
the origin f of this Suffiz, ih^ words formed with it denote either ** the
bringing about " something, or something ** brought about."
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Verbs, or the Theme
of Substantives.
Ob8. The e in «-(«r, <»£r£f ; and th« « in «-6rts^ are merely Connecting Towels.
1. oresoo, 1 CRE ,. crc-Jer, 1 [made to increase], fre-
to increase : J J quent, numerous,
* Lengthened to ^t^pMrUim in tha following passage of Petrua DkLconvs de Ortu tt
Obitu Justorum, 1, imt, ecL Mod : j^snjbdictus , . , in partes cUvifum revmxit C€q)ittmunu
t Sanscrit bhri, Gr. i>4p^v, Lat. /«r-re, ** to bear," etc.
28 ulun suffixes. COb. l
mulgeoy 1 ..^.inJLO ••».»[fii«l^-effti«],l [that by which milking is
to milk : J mMlcirumy J accomplished], milk^paiL
Oba. 4. The formation of tfUmm from vidimm is very mmsaal. The ordinaiy process
of formation woold give viatrmm. Compare /v-fl/is fot fud'ttiU.
U. »io« 1 LU lus-trum, [the accomplisher of expiating],
to expiate : J expiatory offering.
/iuoy Iflu ^Jiu'S'trumy [that by which flowing is
to flow : J accomplished}, calm flow of the sea.
mdneop 1 MON« mon^s-trum, [the accomplisher of warn-
to warn : J i^g]* onaen*
haurtOy Ihaub... [Aawr-^-^rwrn], 1 [the accomplisher of
to draw: J haU'S-trum, J drawing], machine for
drawing water.
12. oapYo« to 1 CAP. [cap-w-^rum*],[the accomplisher of taking I
take hold of: J hold of], halter.
Digitized by
Google
OblI.] adjectives and fiUBSTANTlVES.— ber,1>r-l,eto. 29
a. AuMUif death : .fun er-is, \Juner-bri$2y \ [bringing deaHi],
fune-bris, J deadly, fataL
fanuBy funeral :...,./«««r-M,[/ttW€r-6rt«], "I [brought about by a
funi'brisy f funerall funeral.;
J funereal.
X, a. alUwi, 1 » 8alut'is,[^8alut'ber^^ 1 [bringing about or
^ "'^ J salu'ber, I causing ^— '^'^''
[salut'bris]y T healthy.
3. CIEL, akin to S. >/1 cel.„ cel-e-ber, 1 [causing to be called
CRU ; Gr. fcXv-(i) ; Lat. I cel-e-bris^ \ or spoken of], noted ;
clu-o, to be called or ( J famous ; celebrated,
spoken of: J
k. inffeof to mourn : lug... /tf^-t^-^m,^ [produced or brought
about by mourning],
mournful,
[producing mourning],
disastrous.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
&. ber» br-i, m, ft. bnun* br-1, n, 7. bttlum, blU-i, n,
a. bra, br-ee,/. S. i^bram, e-br-1, n, 8. Y-btilam, Y-bttl-l« n.
3. i-brsf S-br-se^/. tf • bttla* biU-ee, m- and/. 9. brium, br-il, n,
Substantiyes of this class denote, etymologically *, a person or thing
"bringing," or "bearing" something; hence (more commonly) "effecting*'
or "bringing aboat." something; also, "serving for effecting" or "bringing
about " something; and, passively, the thing " brought about."
They are mostly formed from Verbs, by adding the Suffix to their Root
or Theme. Some few are formed from Substantives by adding the Suffix to
the Theme. See Obi. 8.
Ob». 1. In e-hroj g-brum, the e is a Connecting Vowel, as also is i in i-hiUmn,
Obs. 2. In the fbnns in bui; I is the representative of r, and u is inserted for euphony.
1. DMio, 1 FAC \_fac'ber\ \ [the one effecting the
to make : J fd-ber, J making], workman.
* Sanfcrit bkri, Gr. ^p-cm^, Lat. /er-rc, « to bear," <fc.
Digitized by
Google
30 JjATUf SUFFIXES. fC^ I
a. UOf to make level: •••• li li-bre^ [the thing making level],
level; scale-beam.
9. UarOf to rub awaj : .. .teb ter-e-brOy [the thing effecting the
Tabbing awaj]]» gimlet ; borer;
auger.
lateOf to lie hid : LAT lat-e-bra, [the thing effecting the
lying hid], hiding-place.
scateo, to bubble up :.«.SGAT seat-e-brci, [the thing effecting the
bubbling up], bubbling water.
*• CSX, (:sitpc) root ofl CRi cri'hrum^ [the thing effecting
cer-noy to sift : J the sifting], sieve.
JiOy to blow : .fla fla-hrum^ [the thing effecting
the blowing], blast.
ventUoy to winnow : •,,^venttla. ventUd-brum, [the thing effecting
the winnowing], winnowing
machine.
5. tero, to rub awaj : ...teb ter-e-brum, [the thing effecting
the rubbing away], gimlet;
borer ; auger.
cer, akin to Gr. leer eer-e-6r Mm, [the thing carried in
fcdp-a, head : J the head], brain.
tf . r&bo, to rave : ....bab [rflft-iM/a],"! [the one bringing
ra-bukiy I about the raving],
I a brawler or petti-
J fogger.
fariy to speak : fa fa-bula, [the thing brought about
by speaking]^ tale ; fable.
7, stOf to stand: sta sta-bulum, [the thing serving for
standing in], stall; stable.
venor, to hunt : vend .... vend-bulum, [the thing serving
for hunting], hunting-spear.
t/*oeo, to call : voca .... vocd-bulufn, [the thing serving
for calling], appellation ; word.
8. inftindoy 1 .INFX7ND ••• infund-ubulum, [the thing effect-
to pour into : J ing the pouring into], funnel.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. 1.3 ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTITES. — oer, era, cram, etc. 31
^a^eo, to lie hid : lat lat-t-hulum^ [the thing effecting
the lying hid], hiding-place.
9. indo, to mock, e^o. :....LUD lud-t-hrtum^ [the thing eflEect-
ing the mocking], a jest;
mockery.
Ohs, 3. Some few substantives mhrum,hr\um occur which are formed firom other
substantives ; in these the etymological meaning of the Suffix is clearly shown. Such
are,
candela, candle: candda-i candela-brum*, [that which bears a candle],
candlestick.
»>dnu«,hand: ......... m<mt(-i« flnantt-Mum, [that which is borne by the
hand], handle.
Obs. 4. Br is the part of the foregoing Suffixes, from which the meaning springs. The
other letters belong to the various genders. See, also, Ohu. 1, 2.
VIL— A. ADJECTIVES.
1. eer, era, eram. «• Y-cer, "1 • *^^«.
2. oer or cris, ore. f-crus, J ^
3. ti-oer, or ii-oris, &-cre. 6. I-ctUus, Y-ottla, Y-oiUum.
Adjectives in ccr, etc., denote, etymologically f , "doing" or "causing"
something; or "being made'* or "caused to be*' something; or "being
made " or " formed for ** something.
When obtained from Verbs, they are formed by adding the Suffix to the
Root; but when from Substantives or Adjectives, to the Theme.
Ohs, The I and u, before some of the following forms, are merely (Connecting Vowels.
1. poUo, 1 POL [pol'cer], 1 [made polished],
to polish : J pul'cevy J beautiful.
2. acuo, 1 AC \ac'cer], -j
to make pointed : J 5-cer, I ^ , • ^ jt t
[oc-cm], [ t™*^® pointed], sharp.
d-cris, I
medius, middle : „. medt-i \medio-cris, [made middle], mid-
[medio-t] J dling ; moderate.
VOL vol-U'ceVy 1 [made or formed for fly-
voUi'Cris, J ing], flying ; winged.
3. volo, 1 ,
to fly: J
♦ Also with the Suffix hru$, in Petr. S. 75 : hie candelabrus.
"t" From the Sanscrit kara or kri; whence the Latin creo, ** to create," "make," etc.
Digitized by
Google
32 LATIN SUFFIXES. CCa. L
ft. luttiaSf 1 ^iud'i lud-t-cevy 1 causing spxxrt ; that
sport: J lud'CcruSf f serves for sport;
J ludicrous.
B.riaeo, to laugh:......BlD rid-i-ciilusy [making to laugh],
ridiculous.
B* SUBSTANTIVES.
X. mnLmfCr^m, ft. I««ttliiai» l-oia<4f ik
a. ore, er-tef «. 6. ouliuh oul-i, m.
3. ofilnm, otklpiiy n,
Sabstantives in crtcm, etc^ denote, etjmologically*, that which '' makes "
or ** causes to do" something; or, that which "is made" or "caused;** or,
that which " serres for ** something. This latter is their prevalent force.
They are formed by adding the respective Suffixes sometimes to the
Theme, sometimes to the Boot of the Verb. Occasionally r is used as a
Connecting Vowel.
Ob$, 1. In crum and ere the letters or are the |>art of the saffix out of which the
meaning arises : urn and e are merely terminations of neater gender.
Obs, 2. CS/ttm springs firom erum, by changing r into A and by the insertion of the
vowel « between c and I : cuius is merely the masculine form of culum.
&• InTolvo* to wrap in: iNVOLV....[»n»o/r-crMw], 1 [that which
involU'Crum, I serves for wrap-
j ping in], wrap-
J per.
sepettOy to bury 1 septtl .... sepul- crum% [that which serves
for burying], sepulchre.
luo, to paj: LU lu-crum, [that which serves for
paying], gain.
amhuloy to take a walk :. ambula* ambula-crum, [that which
serves for taking a walk],
promenade.
/at7o, to wash : laviu,^. lavd^crum, [that which serves
for washing], bath.
2. UiTolvo, to wrap in : .,....iNVOLV.,..[int7o/r-crc],"| [that which
involu'crcy > serves for wrap-
J ping], wrapper.
* From Sanscrit hara or hri, whence Latin creOt ** to create," etc.
I For the insertion of A in words, see Gellios, 2, 8.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. 10 ADJECTIVES AND SnBSTAKTiy£S.--enim,crl,etc. 33
S. mlroTf to wonder : mira • • • mira-culumy [that which makes
to wonder], miracle.
cceno^ to sup : coRna •« • ccRna-culumy [that which serves
for supping], supper-room.
ffvbernoy to steer :.... guberna guhema* culumy [that which
serves for steering], rudder.
piOy to appease: pia ...,.• pid-culumy [that which serves
for appeasing], sin-offering.
/cro, to carry : fer » fer-culumy [that which serves
for carrying], bier ; barrow.
operioy to cover: oper oper-culum, [that which serves
for covering], cover.
BA=BA, v^ of /3acvuf, 1 BA ba-culumy [that which serves
to go : J for going], walking-stick.
PO=nO, >v/ofirotti(ob-l PO po-culumy [that whic
sol.), to drink : J for drinking], cup.
«• ovunbo to lie 1 CUB etib-uciilum, [^thvit which serves
down : J for lying down], chamber.
everroy to sweep out : ...kverr.... everr-i-culuniy [that which
serves . for sweeping out],
sweep-net.
vehoy to carry: »....veh veh-t-culum, [that which serves
for carrying], carriage ;
vehicle.
5. BA ^ B A, v^ of (iaiywy 1 BA • ba-culuSy [that which serves
to go : J for going], walking-stick.
Obs. 3. The following word a derived from a sabstantiv^. The Suffix is added to the
Theme of the primitive.
tabemOf hut: taberna-i ...tabema'Culum, [that which serves
for a hut], tent.
N,B. The foregoing word affords an instance of a Soffix added to a Suffix : viz.
tabertM'Cultan, from tabema ; while tab-ema is obtained by the Suffix ema being added
to the Boot TAB. See No. XIII. B. S.
Digitized by
Google
34
LATIN SUFFIXES.
[Ch. I.
VIII.— A. ADJECTIVES.
Xa mSf T9L, nulla
a. e-r* rat mnu
9. e-r* h-m.
5a t-fr^mSf t>A"raf t^->niiii«
Adjectives of this class have, etymologicallj, a direct participial force,
and denote a quality of which the etjinological meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to Roots or to the Boot of Verbs.
}
.CAM [rflriii-r»/«],l loved; dear
1. S. ^/ .
to love : J ca-ruSf J
/)/eo, tofill: PLE ple-ruSf filled; full
S. a/ PIT
to purify :
GNA, akin to gnosco,
to know :
...pu pU'TUSy purified; pure.
...GNA gnoTUSf knowing.
2. In* not; 1 ...tn 1 [tWa^-rt««],l untouched; en-
tanffo, to touch : J tag J \integ-rus\y I tire.
pigeo,
to be reluctant :
'mteg'r]y T
integ-e-r, J
1 ...PIG ...[p^-^'w**].") reluctant; un-
ptg-e-r.
willing.
3. libeo s labeo,
to please one's self
■}
LIB.
E/tft-rti*], 1 [pleasing one's
/tft-r], }- self], free.
lib-e-r, J
«• ffSrOy to bear : GEB get' u-lus, bearing ; carrying.
pateoy to lie open : pat pat-u-lusy lying open.
stride, to creak : stkid strtd-u-lus, creaking.
tremOf to tremble : tbbm trem-u-luSy trembling ; tre-
mulous.
6t^o, to drink : bib bth-u4u8y drinking, prone
to drink.
credoy to believe : cbbd cred-u-ltiSy believing, cre-
dulous.
* Hence late Latin Superlative ptjfriiiimtUf Tertull. Hort ad Cast 13«
Digitized by
Google
Ch. I.] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES. — nis, ri, etc. 35
garrio, to chatter : garr garr»u4usy chattering,
garrulous.
queror^ to com- \ quer quer^u- lus, complaining,
plain : J querulous.
5. S. \/ MA« to increase: ...MA ma-t-u-rus* [increased],
ripe, mature.
Obs. 1. The Primary SufSx is ru; « is merely the nominative case-ending.
Obs. 2. The termination e-r is obtained by casting off the « of rv, and also the
nominative case-ending s; and by then inserting the Connecting Vowel e before r.
Compare below, No, IX. A.
Obs. 8. In it-btSf the u is a Connecting Vowel ; / is obtained by substitating one liquid
for another : viz. / for r. In t-u-rus, u is a Connecting Vowel, and t is euphonic.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. rusv rl, m. 6. e-r* ^rl« m. 11. tonif li« %.
a. ra, rsB,/. 7. sua. sl« m. &a« tk-lus, ift-U, m.
3. nmiy rif n, 8. sa, see,/. 13. ift-la, tU8e«/.
6. £-ra, S-ree,/. 10. la* leeij'.
Suhstantives in rus, etc., have, etymologicallj, a participial force, and
denote a person or thing of whoni, or which, the etymological meaning is
descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to Roots.
Obs. 1. The Primary Suffix is r«; s is merelj* the nominative case*ending.
Obs. 2. In ?-nM, S-ra, e is a Connecting Vowel.
Obs. 3. The termination e-r is obtained by casting off the « of nc, and also the
nominative caae-ending s, and by then inserting the Connecting Vowel e immediately
before the r.
Obs. 4. In «if«, flo, r is represented by the s.
Obs. 5. In lus, la, Itan, one liquid is substituted for another : viz. Iforit. The same
change takes place in u-lus, ^-lot U'lum, in each of which instances the u before the
Suffix is a Connecting Vowel.
1. SfVir, akin to MYN, 1 mun Imun-rus^y 1 [the thing warding
V of a-fxvy'€iy, to 1- mu-ruSy J off], wall (of city)*
ward of: J
2.8600, to cut: SEC [5ec-ra], 1 [the cutting thing],
ser^rOy J saw,
* From an obsolete elided form, nuUvr, is obtained the superlative maturrimus^
D 2
Digitized by
Google
36
LATIN SUFFIXES.
[Ch. I.
mandoj
to chew :
scandoy
to mount ;
}HAND [Af€im/-2a], 1 [the chewing things,
[fnan'la]^ f jaw.
1 SCAND .... [^scand'la], 1 [the mounting thing],
J L*^^''-^]* f ladder, stairs, etc.
3. fnleio,
to support :
scalpo,
to cut :
LAB, akin to S. V
LABH, Gr. AAB,
^ of \aiifiavia, to
take :
$tup€o^
\ to be amazed at :
FLAG, akin to Or.
nAHr, ^/of TXiiirtrtay
to strike :
FtJLC fulcrum^ [the supporting thing],
prop.
SCALP scalp-rum^ [the catting thing],
knife.
LAB foft-nwM, 1 [the taking thing],
J lip ; yeesel for liquids.
STOP ««.««. stup-rufHy [the thing amazed at],
debauchery, etc.
FLAG-,— ^. flag-rum^ [the striking thing],
ficourge.
4. PIT, akin to S. v^PA, 1 pu pu'e-rtcs*^ [the fed one], boy,
to feed : J son.
6. PIT, akin to S, ^/ pa, 1 pu pu-e-ra f, [the fed one], girl.
to feed :
•}
daughter.
tf . scalpo» to cut : soalp...... ^oa/p-e-r, [the cutting thing],
knife.
7. PIT, akin to S. a/pa, 1 pu pulsus J, [the fed one], boy, son.
to feed ; J
8. PIT, akin to S. V pa, 1 pu pu-sa J, t*he fed one], girl,
to feed : J daughter.
9. cirpv, the natural Icuou cucu-lus^ [the one uttering the
sound, " cucu : " J natural sound "cucu*'], cuckoo.
* N<m est tamenignorandMmf quod etiam hie pue.ru 9 . . . vehuiUwni pri^uime
inveniuntury Priscian, 6, p. 477, ed. Putsch : i,puere. Plant Asm. 2, 8, 2.
t Antiqtd puellas puerde dic^bantf Suet. Calig. 8.
i Dice iUampusam .* • . • ]!Tam vere putus iu, Eimius as. Varro de LingnS
Latina, 7, § 28 ed. Mttller.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. L] adjectives and substantives. — ni», ri, etc. 37
XO« sedeoy to sit: ...•••.. .SED f f^ef-Za], 1 [the sitting thing],
sel-la, J chair.
XX. Tineioy to bind : TIKC vinc-lumy Qthe binding thing],
chain.
X2. oinro, to gird : cmG cing-u-lus, [the girding thing] ,
girdle.
^ngoy to form : fig Jlg-u-hiSy [the forming one],
potter,
oc, akin to Gr. OXI,*) 00 oc-u-lus, [the seeing thing], eye.
\/ of ObSOl. OV'TOfJiai,
to see :
1,1 (
"1
&3« r«flro» to rule : .........beg reg-ii-ia, [the ruling thing], rule.
iego, to cover : teg teg 'ii-la, [the covering thing], tile.
mus, mouse :...! mu r'is..Smurcap'U-la], 1 [the mouse-tak-
capiOf to take J oaf Imuscap-U'lajy V ing thing], mouse-*
mwcip'U'la, J trap.
ift.amlciOf to clothe : amio amic-ii'lum, [the clothing thing],
cloak,
ctn^o, to gird :' omo cing-u-lum^ [the girding thing],
girdle.
muSy mouse ; 1 ......mur-M, 1 rmttrc0/>-ff-/um],1 [the mouse-
capio, to take: J OAP J Imtiscap'U-lumjy > taking thing],
mu8c%p-u-lumy J mouse trap.
spedoy to behold :...... speo spec^u-lumy [the beholding thing :
hence that which serves for
beholding one's self], mirror,
^e^o, to cover : «.. teg ieg-u-lum, [the covering thing],
roof,
vtnctc^, to bind : vino vinc-u-luniy [the binding thing],
chain.
Ohs. Substantives of this class, obtained from other sabstantives, are not common.
They denote the ** having," or ** being made of" or " with '* that, which their primitive
signifies.
They are formed bv adding the Suffix to the llieme.
lanay wool: lan-a lan-g-rmn, [made of wool],
woollen garment.
md,honej: , mtll-it [m«tt-fa],) [made with honey],
fnel-lOf } honey-water.
D 3
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
38 LATIN SUFJriXES. [Ch. L
IX.— A. ADJECTIVES.
1. rlSf or e-r, re. 2. 6-rl«, or e-r, ft-re.
Adjectives of this class have, etymologically, a participial meaning ; from
which is obtained some word denoting a quality, of which the etymological
meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to Roots, or to the Root of Verbs.
Obs. 1. Words of this formation are very rare.
1. piittev to Stink: put put-ris, stinking.
>, 99 99 />t/^-e-r, stinking.
2. cello (obsoL), to 1 ...cel cel-e-ris, [put in motion], swift.
pat in motion : J
„ „ „ ce/-€-r, [put in motion], swift.
Obs. 2. The Primaiy Suffix is ri; s is merely the nominative case-ending; and the
? in ^ - r t < is a C!onnecting YoweL
Obs. 8. The termination e-r is obtained by casting off the i of the Primary Suffix, riy
and also the nominative case-ending s, and further by inserting e, as a Connecting
Vowel, before r; &a, ptit-ri$t put-e-r. Compare above, No, VIII. A. Obs. 2.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. rto, rl-s,/. 2. A-rU, fi-rlHh/.
" Substantives of this class, when obtained from other Substantives, signify
something "having" that — from Verbs, the ** doing" that — which their
primitives imply.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives, or
the Root of Verbs.
1. aoles, edge : acteW.... acie-ris, [having an edge], axe
(used in sacrifices).
Digitized by
Google
Ch« L] adjectives and substantives, — miui,ma«miiiii« etc. 39
2. seoo, to cut S£0
Obs. In U'lity tt is a Connecting YoweL
;• seoo, to cut S£0 sec-u-ris^ [the cutting thing],
axe, hatchet.
X.— A. ADJECTIVES.
Xm miui, m»f mum. 2. i-nnuif i-m»f i-mmn.
Adjectives in mus^ when derived from Verbs, have, etymologically, a
participial force, and point out a quality of which the etymological force
is descriptive. When derived from Substantives they denote the " having "
that which their primitive denotes.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Verbs, or the Theme
of Substantives.
N,B, Words of this class are few in number.
&. alo, to nourish: al aZ-muv, nourishing.
fero, 1 FBR [/er-mi«], 1 [bearing],
to bear : J fir-mu9y J strong.
ferveoy \ FEBV f/erv-ww*], 1 warm.
to be warm : J \^fer-mus\ V
for-mus, J
2. mater, mother : , mat r-is matr-i-muSf having a mo-
ther still living.
pater, father : ^.pat r-is patr't-mus, having a father
still living.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. mnMf ml* m. 4. V-miis, X^mU m.
2. ma, m»,/. 5. l-ma* V-mae,/.
3a mum, mi, w.
Substantives in muSy etc., are derived from Verbs, and have, etymo-
logically, a participial meaning ; and hence, in a derived force, denote some^
thing of which the etymological meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root.
N.B. Words belonging to this class are not nnmerons, and their roots are, for the
tnoet part, uncertain and obscure.
i.Pir, akin to 6Y, rootl ...FU ..♦. /u-mus*, [the rushing thing],
of dviif, and S. /v/ }- smoke.
DHtr, to rush :
'}
* The Sanscrit word is dhu-tna$.
J> 4
Digitized by
Google
40 LATIK SUFFIXES. [Cb. J.
a. iXAihakin toGr. 1 ....flag IJ^og-tna']^ 1 [the burning tliixig]^
^Xcy-'i'ytoburn: J jfiam-ma, J flame.
/arty to speak : fa ,,.. fa-tna [the spoken thing],
talk ; report.
gluboy \ GLUB [^/ti6-m£i], 1 [the pealing off
to peal off: J glu-ma, J thing], husk ; sbelL
S. /v/ LU, to cut : LU lU'ftMj [the cutting thing],
thorn.
„ „ lu'tna, [the cut thing], kind
of cloak.
«puo, tospit: spu spu-mOy [the spit thing],
foun^ eic,
struoy to Tsise : stbu stru^ma, [the raised thing],
(scrofulous) tumour.
3. pMMo, to feed ; akin 1 ...
to S. -v/PA, to nourish : J
PA.
. . [pa-mum], 1 [the nourishing
pd^mum, J or feeding thing],
fruit.
4. S. >v/AW. to blow! ...AN
or breathe : J
.... an-i-mtiSy [the blowing or
breathing thing], the vital
principle.
5. S. Ji/ JLV, to blowl ...AN,, an-t-ma, [the blowing or
or breathe : J breathing thing], air ; breath.
XL— A. ADJECTIVES.
1. tns, tftf tmicia
2. dus, da, dmn.
3. Y-dQS, 1-da, Y-dnm.
ft. SOS, sa, sum.
Adjectives in tus, derived from Verbs or Boots, have, etymologically, a
participial force, and denote a " quality " or " condition " akin to the mean-
ing of their primitives. Some few are derived from active verbs, and have
an active, and some a passive force ; but, generally speaking, they spring
from neuter verbs, and have a neuter force.
They are foi*med by adding the Suffix to the Hoot.
Digitized by
Google
On. 1.3 ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIYES. — ^tiu,ta«tiim, etc. 41
06s. The Primary Soffix is tu, s beiug the nominative case-ending. From this dus
and 9U8 are obtained by changing ttod and *, respectively. In i-dut, f is a Connecting
"Vowel.
X. feroy to bear : fer fer-tus, bearing ; fertile.
scio, to know: sci sci-tusy knowing; wise.
2. nud, akin to San-1 nud [nud-dus^ "{[made ashamed;
scrit nadshy to be j- nu-dus, J hence,] naked,
ashamed : . J
fero, to bear: fer [J'er-dus], 1 bearing, pregnant.
for-dus, J
3. alffSoy to be cold: «alg .^MMlg-t-duSy cold.
areoy to be dry: .^ ar ar-t-duSy drj.
eaUoy to be hot:... gal xsaUl-dHSy hot.
frigeoy to be cold: prig .frtgl-duSy cold.
humeoy to be moist: ...huh hum-i-duSy moist.
luceoy to be bright: •••luc luc-f-dusy bright.
madeo, to be wet: ......had mad-Udus, wet.
paUeOy to be pale: pall .palUi-duSy pale.
rtibeoy to be red: rub rub-i-duSy red.
tepeo, to be warm: ....tep tep-t-dus, warm.
turgeOy to be swollen: turg turg-t-duSy swollen.
rttplo, to hurry 1 rap rap-i-dus \ [hurried along],
J J rapid.
disturbed, confused,
disordered,
[turned], scared,
alarmed.
turhoy to disturb: •••...turb Jurb-i-dus
TBEP, akin to Greek Itrep trep-t-dus
t/mV-w, to turn : J
rapto, to tear: rap rop-t-c/t^, tearing.
4. fuio, to deceive : fal Jal-stiSj deceiving, false.
cello (p\)so\.)y toputl CBL ceUsuSy • [pu* ib motion (up-
in motion : J wards)], high.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. tns, ti, in* S«tnm»tl««i. S« 4iiSydiyf».
a. ta« tae,/. 4. l-tns, 1-ti, m, 6. ia« ■»,/.
Substantives of this class have mostly an active or a passive force.
They are formed by adding the Su&l to a Boot, or to the Boot of Verbs.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
42 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. I.
1. itbteOf to free : libeb lib^-tus^ [the freed oneJ» freed-*
man.
a. TlTOy to live: viv [t?it?-to], 1 [the lived thing]]* life.
[t;it;-to],l[
ri toy J
S. mlnoTy to project : Mm [min-tum], 1 [the projecting
men~tumy J thing], chin.
S. // LI, to dissolve : ..LI [/e-^m], 1 [the dissolving thing],
le-tum^ J dissolution, death.
sou, akin to S. -v/lscu scu^tum, [the covering thing],
TSHHAD, to cover : J shield. ^
tegOf to cover : teg [te^-ft<jw], 1 [the covering thing],
tec'tuni, J roof.
4. ei&mbo, to lie or 1 CUB cub-UtuSy [the thing leaned upon],
lean upon : J elbow.
5. S. -v/ &v« to Ilu lu'dusy [the relaxing thing],
relax, etc, : J sport, play.
6. nScSo, to hurt : NOG noc-sa = noa?a, [the hurting
thing], hurt, harm, injury.
BIG, akin to c|o/C<('9 to 1 BIG rig^a = rixa, [the contending
contend J thing], quarrel.
XIL— A. ADJECTIVES.
2. &^tas, ft-ta» ft^^tmn. 5. e-fi.^tiu»9 S-ft.aa« S-ft-tmn.
Sa i"tiiSi t-^ta* i"^tiiiii«
Adjectives in tus, etc., derived from Substantives, etymologically signify
" provided with," or "having** tfiat which the primitive signifies.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme.
Obs, 1. In d-iu$f i-tusy u-tus, g-a-tuif the a, e, t, and u are respectively Connecting
Vowels.
N,B. For adjectives of this class, formed from other adjectives, see below, Obs. 2.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. 1.] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES. — tns, tamtam, etc. 43
* . liteos (bOnor), I Zhdnos-is^y 1 [^hdnos-tusi] 1 furnished with ho-
honour: J hdnor-is^ J hdnes-tus, V DOur; honoured;
J honourable.
dnuSf burden : ...^ ..dnir-is [^iier-fu#]y1 having a burden ;
[dnes-tus]^ > burdened.
^f J
dnuS'tiiSf
robur, oak: robds'is* ^•.[robos'ius']}
provided with, or
made of oak ;
oaken.
having guilt;
guilty.
scHluSf guilt : sciler-is .... [sceler-tuSf"]
sciles'tus,
funusy death : .fu n ir-is .... {Juner-hu], 1 provided with, or
funeS'iuSf V having death ;
J t. e. deadly.
jusy right: .jur'U [/wr-fiw], 1 provided with, or ha-
jus'tusy Y ving right ; right-
J ful.
t^^tM, loveliness : ...vinHr^is ....rt?Ai«r-fM#],l provided with
[t;^ne«-/tf«], I" loveliness; love-
vinuS'tuSy J ly, beautiful.
2. ftia^wing: al-te a/-d-h<«, provided with wings;
winged.
ansa, handle : ans-cR ans-d-tusy provided with, or hav-
ing, a handle or handles.
barboy beard : barb'Ce barb-d-tusy having a beard ;
bearded.
JimbrtcB (plur.), l/tm6rf-a- 1 fimbrl^d-tuSy having a fringe ;
fringe: J rum J fringed.
togay toga: tdg-^ tog-d-tusy having a toga.
rir^a, twig: virg-ce t;ir^-a-<««, 1 having twigs;
J made of twigs.
„ stripe (of a 1 „ " T ^^^'"S stripes ;
garment): J J i^triped.
dciiltiSyeye: dcul-i dcul-d'tusy provided with, or
having, an eye or eyes.
coTy heart, t. e. mind, 1 c o r d-is card-d-tusy having mind or j udg •
judgment: J ment; wise; prudent.
densy tooth : den t^is denl'd-tuSy furnish ed with teeth ;
toothed.
/alx, scythe : .fa Ic'-is falc'd-tuSy furnished with a
scythe; scythed.
* Sfie foot-note to iir6o«, p. 45.
Digitized by
Google
44 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. L
S. ffUfimnif hood: .....^a/er-t ffdler^i'tus, furnished witk a
hood; hooded.
autiSf ear : au r-is aurA-tus, furnished with ears.
mdy honey: melius meU-Utus, having honey.
pellUy skin : ......ptll'is pell-i-tusy provided with a skin
or skins, (hence, clad in skins).
turrisy tower, or \tnrf^is turr^-tuSf provided with a
turret : J tower, or turret ; turreted.
4. astnst craft : ^.ast'-us o^^-te-fc^, furnished with craft;
crafty,
ctnc^i^, girdle : einet-ms cinct-u-tus, provided with a
girdle; girded.
versuSy a turning: ...vers'-m vers^u-tus^ [provided 'with
turnings], clever ; shrewd,
cor^tt, horn: corn'^ com-U'tus, furnished with
horns; horned.
verUy a pike : v^r-u vir-u-tusy provided with a pike.
5. mamma, breast: mamm-iB mamm-e-d'tuSf [furnished with
breasts], large- or full-breasted.
Obs, 2. Some few adjectives in S'tus, derived irom other adjectives, have a passive
force, as if they were participles derived from some obsolete verbs of the first conjuga-
tion. Thej are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme. Such are, —
aBnu, white: alb-i aBS-tus, [whitened], clothed in white.
ateTf black: atr^i eOr'd'iuSf [blackened], clothed in black.
/nJ7u«, dark : pull-i puU-d-tus, [darkened], clothed in dark garments.
As If from the assumed verbs aBto^ atrOf puUo, of the 1st conjugation.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. tain, ti, n, 2. S-tmn, S^ti, n.
Substantives in turn, or e-tum^ derived from other Substantives denoting
" things," point out something ** supplied," or ** provided with,'* that, which
is signified by the primitive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of the primitive.
Obs, The Primary Suffix is ^um; e is a Connecting Vowel.
Digitized by
Google
Oh. I,] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES. — tiim,tl, etc. 45
i. arl>os,'l ^ arbds'-is'\ [arbos-tum],^ [thing supplied
tree : J arbus'tumf > with trees],
J plantation.
frutexy \ ....../rM*tc-w..[/r«/tc-ft<»i],1 [thing supplied
shrab : J fruteC'tum, V with shrubs],
J shrubbery.
salix, wilk)W : saltc-is ... salic'tunty [thing supplied with
willows], willow-bed.
virgula, slender shoot : virgul^cB.. virgul-tumy [thing supplied
with slender shoots], shrub-
bery. ^
a. arl»or« tree : arbar^is... arhcr-e-tumy [thing supplied
with trees], plantation.
arundoy reed : arundtn-is arundtn-e-tumy [thing supplied
with reeds], bed of reeds.
dumus, bramble : dum-i dum -e-ium, [thing supplied
with brambles], thicket.
laurus, IsLurel : laur-i laur-i'tumy [thing supplied
with laurels], laurel-grove.
myrtusy myT\\Q I myrt-i ... myrt-e'tum, [thing supplied
with myrtles], myrtle-grove.
pomus, fruit-tree : .pom-i pdm-e-tumy [thing supplied
with fruit-trees], orchard.
rosoy rose-tree : rds-a rds-e- tuniy [thi ng supplied with
rose-trees], rose-bed.
rimen, osier: vtmin-is .. vimtn-e-tumy [thing supplied
with osiers], osier-bed.
fimtiSy munure : .fim-i ^w-e-fww, [thing supplied with
manure]^ manure-heap.
saxum, large stone: ...sax-i sax-e-tumy [thing supplied with
large stones], stony place.
* Arbosem pro arbor e antiqui dicebant, et robotem pro robore, Fest. p. 15 ed.
MuUer.
Digitized by
Google
46 I-ATIN SUFFIXES. CCa. L
XIII. — A. ADJECTIVES.
1. rnist BAf Biua. 6.
a. a-niw« ft-na, ft-mmi. ^ 7.
4. 1-nnSf I-BSv 1-niiia. 9. A-ndiUp
S. l-nnsv Y-iMf l-nma.
Adjectives in nus, etc., etymologically, signifj "gifted" or "provided
with," etc, ; and hence, a " belonging to," their primitive. When, however,
used in a derived force, those formed from the names of Animals espe-
ciallj denote the flesh of such Animals ; those from the names of Trees and
some few other substances point out the material of which any thin^ is
made; and other words, principally, some quality possessed by their
primitive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of their primitives.
Obs. 1. Adjectives of this class have, etymologically, a close affinity of meaning to
those in hcs, etc ; see No, XII.
Oht. 2. While adjectives in d-n^Sut properly signify *< a belonging" to their primi-
tives, thej thence have, when used in a derived force, the same meaning as their primitives
themselves, or even express the conseqaence of belonging to such a class : thus coUeeta-
tieuSf what is collected — coUectus; but rejectanihitf that is to be rejected, expresses the
consequence of belonging to the class comprehended under rejectua.
1. ver, spring: ver-is ver-nus, belonging to spring
vernal.
f rater y brother : frat r-is {^fratr-nus]
frcUer-nuSy
matery mother: matr'-is [matr'ntis^^
mater-nuSy
patery father: ,* patr-is [^patr-nus'],
pater^nusy
larixy larch: larxc-is [laric-nus^y
lariff-nuSy
extirusy outside: extir^i exter-ntiSy belonging to the out-
side; external.
tw/^r«*, below : inf^r-i infer-nuSy belonging to below;
infernal.
supirusy on high: .... supir^i .•.. super-nusy belonging to that
which is on high; celestial;
supernal.
belonging to a
brother; fraternal.
belonging to a mo-
ther ; maternal.
belonging to a
father; paternal.
belonging to larch;
of larch.
Digitized by
Google
Cn. L] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES. — BiMtBa«nii]n, etc 47
2. mSridies, 1 m^ridi-ei*.. m^ic^-a-ntt^, belonging to mid-
xnid-day : J day.
mons, moixniaini mont'is mont-d-nusy belonging to a
mountain; mountainous.
opptdumy town : opp td-i.,,.., oppid-d^nus^ belonging to a
town.
rusitcus (^\ihst.)j9i\ru8tic'i rusiic-d-nus, belonging to a
rustic : J rustic.
urbsy city; urb-is urb-d-nusy belonging to a city :
hence^ polished; urbane.
mundusy world : mund-i fnund-d-ntis, belonging to the
world; mundane.
3. ftlliis, another: dli-us dlt-e-mis, belonging to another.
4. leoy lion : •• leofi'ts leonA-nuSy belonging to a lion.
j9ect^ cattle : pecu,., pecu'l-ntLSy belonging to cattle.
vacca, cow: vacc-ee vacc-i-nus, belonging to a cow;
vaccine.
vipiray viper : vip er-ce viperA- nus^ belonging to a
viper.
vUulusy calf: vitul-i vitul-i-nusy belonging to a calf.
saly salt: sdl-is sdl-i-nuSy of or belonging to
salt ; saline.
stagnumy stagnant l«^a^n-t .... stagn-i-nuSy belonging to stag-
water: J nant water,
mar^, the sea : mar -is mdr-unus, belonging to the
sea; marine.
divttSy a deity : div-i div-i-nusy belonging to a deity ;
divine.
masciilus (suhBt)t'\...mascul'i,,. masctd-unust belonging to a
a male : J male ; masculine,
y^ml^na^ a female : femin-ce ... femtn-t-ntiSy belonging to a
female ; feminine.
ftgiilusy a potter: figul-i ftgul-tnus, also 1 belonging to
Jigl'l-nuSy J a potter.
wMcM* (subst), T ...midtc'i .... medic-i-nus, belonging to a
a. physician : J physician.
sutor, a cobbler : su tdr-is .... sutor-unusy also 1 belonging to
sutr-i-ntis, J a cobbler.
Digitized by
Google
48 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. I.
agnttSy leimh I agn-i affn-i-nuSf helongmg to a
lamb.
anaSf dnck: dndUU dndi-l-nus^ belonging' to a
duck.
anseTy goose : anser-is • ^ ans^unusy belonging to a
goose.
drtesy ram : dri ii^is .... ariet-i'nuSy belonging to a ram.
dstnus, ass : dstn-i dsin-i-nusy belonging to an ass;
asinine.
bosy (a head of)l bov-^is bov-t-nusy belonging to cattle.
cattle : J
ctiballusy horse: caball-i,... cahall-t-nusy belonging to a
horse.
came/tM, camel : camel-i .,,. camel-i-nusy belonging to a
cameL
canisy dog: cdn-is cdnA-nuSy belonging to a dog;
canine.
iquusy horse : equ-i equ-i-nusy belonging to a horse;
equine.
fSra, wild animal : fir-tB fer-i-nus, belonging to a wild
animal.
8. adaiwi adamant :•„. adatnan t-is adamant-t-nusy belonging to
adamant; adamantine.
cidrtiSy a cedar: cedr-i cedr-t-nusy of cedar.
crystallumy crystal: .. crystall-i . crystall't-nus, of crystal: crys-
talline.
fagusy a beech : f<^9'i fagA-nuSy of beech.
6. {hocy this) ; 1 hoc 1 [hoc-di-e'r-ntLs] 1 belonging to
cfies, day : J di-e* J hodi-e-r-nuSy J this day.
7. dies, day: di-e* di-u-r-nuSy belonging to day;
diurnal.
no;r, night: noct-is noet-u-rntiSy belonging to
night ; nocturnal.
1, a. pdpftlnsv a poplar :.j90/) u /-{.*•. /7^t</-9t«fy *j belonging to a
popul-neusy j- poplar; of pop-
J lar.
* Old Genitive. See above, p. 22.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
Ch. L] adjectives and substantives. — 1
etc. 49
quercvLSj oak: •• querc-us.i
sdlixy willow : salic-is
ibur^ ivory ;"! tbor-is ,
elephant : J
.iquerc^usl "| belonging to the
.[salic''nus]j
salig-nusy
[saHc-neus],
saliff-neus,
ibur-nusy
[ibor-niusl^
belonging to wil-
low; of willow.
made of ivory ;
belonging to an
elephant
9. ext^roSf outside :
coliectuSf collected
refectus, rejected: ,
subttus, sudden : ..
supervdcutM, super-
fluous :
„^,exter'i,.»,.,[ext€r'd-neus29^ belonging to the
extT'd-neuSt I outside; exter-
V nal; t.«. coming
I from without ;
J also, strange.
;... collect'i .... eoUect-d-neuSf belonging to what
is collected : collected.
... rejeet'i reject-d-netLS^ belonging to what
is rejected ; to be rejected.
... subU'i subit-d^niuSf belonging to what
i« sudden ; sudden.
}supervdcu'i supervac-d-neus^ belonging to
what is superfluous.
Obs. 3. Some Substantives occar in inus, ina, Inum. Strictly speaking, these are ad-
iectives in concord with substantives understood. Such are,
liberttnusy of or pertaining to a freedman : Hbertinus (««. vtr^, a freedman.
lUtertina {scfenuna)^ a freedwoman.
mSdlcinus, of or belonging to healing : mecUnna (sc. ars^, the healing art, me-
dicine.
„ „ „ (sc, tabertut), [a shop pertain-
ing to healing], a me-
dical man's shop or dis-
pensary.
„ „ „ (w. re«), fa thing pertaining
to healing], a remedy.
siUrtnus, of or belonging to a cobbler : tuirina (sc. qfficind), a cobbler's stalL
„ (se, an), a cobbler's trade.
textrinus, of or belonging to weaving : textrina {sc, offinna), a weaver's shop.
iextnnum (jc, opus^, a weaver's work,
weavmg.
textrtnutf of or belonging to building : textrinum (absolute). Pa place for build-
ing], a dockyard.
S
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
50 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ce. I.
Obt. 4. There are also some sabstantives in tjui, ina (derived f^m substantives);
evidently of an adjectival nature, but which cannot be referred to any known adjective.
They must, therefore, be regarded as springing from other sources. Such are,
caml/er, hangman : carmffc-is .. eamific-inat office of hangman.
diocf or, teacher : doetor-is [<loc<or-iiia], ) learning.
docir'ima, }
disefpiilus, scholar : dite^nU-i . . . IdUcipul-ina'], \ instruction,.
dudpl-tMOj }
i^feXf -workman I opific'is [<^/ic-vu^, *! work*shop.
[O^C-tlMl], >
offic'tna, I
/>i«cM, fish: .puc'is /nsc-ina, fish-pond.
/onstor, barber : totutor-i$ ... [tons/or-tna], ) barber's shop.
tonstr-ina, }
lanlusj butcher: 2a»l-t. Itau-enot butcher's shop.
Their adjectival force, and also the greater clearness of their meanings, will be the
more seen, if, as in the case of Substantives in ale, etc. {^Ch, II. No, I. p. 70), they be re-
ferred to some assumed adjective, thus :
car»i/Jc-i»«s, belonging to a hangman: ...] ^^^^""^^ f*^'^' *^* ^®^ ^^ ^«-
^rdoetor-fjuxl 1 C***^)* *^® pursuit or
doetr-xntu I ^^®"^® ^^ * teacher ;
^^ J learning.
[<fi.,p«-l„«. belonging to. Kholar: .. ] t*^^]' } (^^ttLSr^o^"
ropiJic-inuB, ") "] \opifiC'Vna\ "J (<edef or tabema), a build -
1 npfic-inuif Vbelonging to a workman : ... lopfic-inaj, >ing or shop belonging to
Ijoffic'inus, J J officina, J a workman ; a workshop.
[p«c-i»«^belongingtoiUh: ] l^^^ ,^^^T" "^"^"^ "'
[^toTutr-tnus, belonging to a barber: ] tonstr-ina (Jabemd), a barber's shop.
^fani-eniMjbelonging to a batcher : ] lani-ina {tabema), a butcher's shop.
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. nus, nl, m. 4. na« nee,/. 7. 1-na« i-nse./.
2. l-nus, 1-nl, m. 5. O-na, O-nee,/. S. e-r-na« e-r-nee,/.
3. l-nusv I-nlt m. 6. I-Ba« l-n»v/. 9. niiin» nl, n.
Substantives in nus^ etc., are obtained partly from Substantives, partly
from Verbs or Roots. When obtained from Substantives they denote "be-
longing" to that which their primitive implies ; but when from Verbs or
Boots, a person or thing "doing" or ** being" that, which such Verb or
Root points out ; sometimes, even, they denote something " done.'*
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives, or
to Roots, whether Primary or Secondary.
Digitized by
Google
Oh. L] adjectives AND SUBSTANTIVES.— nii»,iil, etc. 51
a.. d6mo, to subdue : dom dom-nus^ [the subduing one],
lord, master.
2. „ „ dom-i-nuSy [the subduing one],
lord, master.
3. conenmbo, 1 CONCUB.... concub-i-nuSy [one lying with
to lie with : J (another)], bed-fellow.
4. dttmo, to subdue : dom dom-na, [the subduing one],
lady, mistress.
lueeoy to shine: luc [/iic-«a], 1 [the shining thing],
lu-na, J moon.
PET,akin toHETjGr. 1 PET pet-na*, 1 [the flying thing],
Vof TTcVo/iat, to fly: J pen-na, J wing.
5. membnun, limb, membr-u, menibr-d'nay [the thing belong-
ing to a limb], membrane.
6. ddmo, to subdue: dom dom-t-na^ [the subduing one],
lady, mistress.
7. luceoy to shine : LUC Luc-t-na^ [the shining one],
Lucina.
concum&o, to lie with: COKCUB concub-l-nuy [one lying with
(another)], bed-fellow ; con-
cubine.
/orfio, todig: roD fod-i-na^ [the thing dug], pit ;
mine.
rapioy to plunder: ....rap ra/>-t-»a, a plundering.
riioy to fall to ruin :...RU ruA-na^ a falling to ruin.
a. lucdo, to shine : luc luc-e-r-nay [the shining thing],
lamp.
9. reffOf to rule : REG reg-numy [the thing ruled],
kingdom.
TIG, akin to S. Vl tig tig-num, [the thing cleft],
TAKSH, to cleave : J timber.
* According to Festns this is the old fonn of the word : pennat antiquot fertur ap-
pdidtepetnaiex Graeco, Fest. Sched. ap. Laetuin, 14, 10.
B 2
Digitized by
Google
52 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. L
Lio, akin to S. ^
BAH, to bum:
FRBy akin to S. V
DHBi, to hold :
Lia lignum, [the kindling thing],
log of wood, fire-wood.
FRE fre-num^ [the holding thing],
bit, bridle.
Ofn, 1. In l-nict, {-»««, l-no, i< no, « ia a Connecting ToweL
Ofrt. 2. In hicerna, e U a Connecting Towel, r is euphonic.
Ofrt. 8. For other substantiyes in mm, ino, Inum, see above, iVb. A. Obn. 4, 5.
XIV. — A. ADJECTIVES.
1. a-tl-«h ANtX-fl. «• -• tI-0. 6. 1-«I-«h i«tYHk
a.«HhaNtl-ik S. eHhS-tl-Jhor I-tlHk 7. -i-«h I-«fHk
Adjectives of this class are formed, properlj, from words denoting ''place,"
and signify *' of,** or '* belonging to,** such place. Sometimes thej are de-
rived from words denoting ** rank,'* and then they signify "of," or " belong-
ing to,*' such rank.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme.
Ohs. The Primary Suffix iuti^t being the nominative case-ending. However, It dis-
appears oftentimes, ^d even the case-ending « is lost In iVb. 4.
1. ArdSa* Ardea: Arde^a... Ardi-d-tis*, of, etc, Ardea.
Arpinum, Arpinum :.„Arpin-i ..' Arpin-d'tis*, of, etc., Arpinum.
2, a. cnjust of whom ? ..cuj-i cuj-aSy of, etc., what country.
noster, our: nostr-i.,, nostr-as, of, etc., our country.
vester, your : vestr-i ,., vestr-as, of, etc., your country.
infernus,
belonging to below :
supernziSj
belonging to above : ^
infern-i.. in/em-as, of, etc., the lower
country.
supern-i. supem-as, of, etc., the upper
country.
^n^tMm, Antium : Anti^i ... Anti-as, of, etc., Antium, An-
tian.
* Found usually in the elided form, t. e. with the Suffix as {No, 2).
Digitized by
Google
Os. T.] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTAKTIYES. — ft^^Y-s, a-^Y-m etc 53
l». optimuSy best: optim-i„, optim-aSy of, etc.y what is best;
aristocratic.
primusy first: ,prim-i ,... prim-asy of, etCy what is first
principal.
3. Jaanrentam* 1 Laurent-i »\^Laurent'8]y\o^y etCy Lauren-
Laurentum: J Lauren-Sy J turn.
Ttidery Tuder: Tuder-is. Tuder-Sy of, etc^ Tuder.
TibuTy Tibur: Tibur-u. Tibur-Sy of, eie.y Tibur.
FHcenum, Picen urn :... Pice n-t ... Picen-Sy of, cfc., Picenum.
*. var, Nar : Nar-is .... NaVy of, e/c, Nar.*
s. Ceeref Caere: Carets,,. Cter-e», of, c/o., Caere.
•. ■ainnlamj 1 . . , iSa m n t-t ..[ 5ainnt-t-fM'], 1 of, «^c., Samni-
Samniumr^J Samn-utis J urn.
7. Samnimn, 1 Samni'i..[_Samni'i'8'], 1 of, e^c, Samnium.
Samnium : J Samn-i-Sy J
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
Besides the various Adjectives denoting names of peoples, &c., mentioned
in No, A. above, and used substantively, there are also various Substantives
belonging to this class, which were undoubtedly Adjectives originally, though
they have not come down to us as such in the Latin authors whose writings
we possess. Properly they denote "locality;" but in a derived force
"rank."
maffniuy great : magn-i... magn-aty [belonging to what is
great]> a magnate, prince.
>/ PEN, within PEN Pen-aieSf (p\ur.)y [belonging to
within], Penates.
Prps, only found as Substantive, and meaniog ** a dweller on the Nar.''
B 3
Digitized by
Google
54 LATIN SUFFIXES.' [,Cb
XV. — A. ADJECTIVES.
1. oiis« ea« cvin. %m fi^i€iuhll«-eafU-eiim. 6. t-z«i-e-iM.
S« l-ouSf l-eAf I-enm.
Adjectives in ctu, etc., derived from Verbs, have a participial force, and
sometimes are identical in meaning with the participles of the verbs, from
which they are derived ; at other times they betoken a quality of which the
etymological meaning is descriptive ; sometimes a " being prone ** to do that
which their primitive describes. When derived from Substantives they
denote the " having," or a " being prone to ** that, which their primitive
describes.
They are formed by adding the Suffix, to Root?, whether Primary or
Secondary ; or to the Theme of Substantives.
Obs. 1. The Primary Suffix is cu-f, of which « is the nominative case-ending; in
X'CUSt i'cus, u-eu$f l,i,tt, aie Connecting Vowels ; in a j: (^a-c-s), i x (t-c-a), o x
(O'C'S), a, t, o, are Connectiag Vowels ; while, by the throwing out of the u, x is formed
by the - ombination of 8 with the preceding c.
1. nc. akin to S. v^l ...sic sic-ciiSy made dry; dried ; dry.
cusH, to be made >■
dry: J
2. meddorf to heal : med med-t-cus, healing.
mordeOy to bite : mord mord't-cus, biting ; snappish.
3. amo, to love : AM am-i-ctis^ loving ; friendly.
pwc?co, to feel 1 pud pud-l-ctis, feeling ashamed;
ashamed : J bashful.
awto, tolove: am am-t-c2£5, beloved ; dear.
4. o&do, to fall : CAD cad-u-cus, falling (rare).
cddo, to fall : cad cad-u-cus, prone to fall.
5. audSo, to dare : aud aud-a-Xy daring.
fero, to produce : fer ycr-a-a?, producing ; productive.
minor, to project ; 1 min min-a-x, projecting; threat-
to threaten : j ening.
50^10, to perceive! ...SAG sag-a-x, perceiving keenly;
keenly : J sagacious.
sequor, to pursue : ... sequ sequ-a-x, pursui ng.
sonOy to resound: son son-a-x, resounding.
y Google
Os. I.] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES. — ovft, ea, oiim» etc. 55
ieneo, to hold : ten ten-a'-'Xy holding; tenacious.
eefo, toeat: ed e^f-a-a^^pronetoeat; gluttonous.
Jalloy to deceive : fall falUa-Xy prone to deceive ; fal-
lacious.
loquory to talk : LOQU Idqu-a- .r, prone to talk ; loqua-
cious.
fnentior,\ ment [»icn^-a-a?],l prone to lie; Ijing.
to lie : J mend-a-Xy J
mordeoy to bite : mobd morrf-a-a;, prone to bite ; biting.
rapio, to snatch: rap ra/?-a-a:, prone to snatch; rapa-
cious.
r^t/o, to watch : vigil vigtl-a-Xy prone to watch;
watchful.
vorOy to devour : VOR vdr-a-x, prone to devour; vora-
cious.
capto, to take or 1 cap cap-a-Xy that can take, etc;
contain : J capacious.
lingua y tongue : lingu-cB lingu-a-x, [_prone to tongue],
talkative.
tf . mlseeo, to mix : Misc misc-i-Xy [mingling], change-
able.
7. ceUo, to urge along 1 cel ceZ-o-a*, urging one's self along ;
(obsolete) : j swift.
y^ro, to bear: fer fer-o-Xy bearing one's self, or
rushing, onwards; fierce.
Obs. 2. Substantives are found with some of the above terminations (also in their
feminine or neuter forms). These are strictly adjectives, and are used substantively
-with reference to some word to be supplied : as,
medfeuM, healing, CviA : a physician.
amtciM, beloved, Cnr) : a friend (beloved by me).
^ loving, Ivir) : a friend (loving me, &c).
fnedteOf healing, (<'''') • ^^® healing, or medical art.
cdox, swift, (navis) : a swift sailing vessel.
Obs. 3. Some adjectives of this class are also formed from substantives, and denote
the " pertaining " or ** belonging to " the primitive, and hence some quality attaching to
or descriptive of it Such are —
beHunif war: bell-i, Jbell-i-ctts pertaining to war; warlike.
civis, citizen: civ -is civ-i-cus pertaining to a citizen; civic
dassis, fleet : class 'is . . .cktss-i-ctts belonging to a fleet.
domintiSf lord : dom t n -t ...domin-i-cus belonging to a lord.
gens, nation: .gent -is Ment-i-cus belonging to a nation; national.
hostiSf enemy : host 'is nost-i-eus belonging to an enemy ; hostile.
pater, father : .patr- is .ptUr-i-cus belonging to a father ; paternal.
Obs. 4. There are also some substantives derived from other substantives, which seem
to have been originally adjectives, but which do not appear in an adjectival form in the
Latin works that have come down to us. Such are —
B 4
Digitized by
Google
56 LATIN 6UFFIXBS. IQ&. 1
JkUr, A workmtii ifahr-'i /aJbrA-ea, a workman's shop.
mammtf hand : man -ma .flum-y-ec sleeves of a tanic reachin^^ to the
hands ; manacles.
MS, foot: jped'U ,|wf-f-ea .shackle; fetter (for the feet>.
uetuM, conchs Jeet^i ipcf-f-ea litter; sedan.
In each of the forssoing instances the word is best explained bj supposing aa adjeis
tiye (viz. fabriem$, belonging to a faber, or workman ; muMiems, belongm^ to the
iiMm««, or hand ; ptdUmt, belonging to the pet, or foot ; leetlcua^ belonging to a tectum or
couch); and by supplying the following substantives: viz., tabema with fidnfea;
vate$ with aumlos; aOma with mtmHtrnf ** manacles ;" eat&M also with /wclfeti, shackle ;
aedei wUh iectioa.
Ob§, 5. From nAer, "red," is obtained mbnea, "red earth;** but this, tLgtdn, is
rather to be regarded as an adjective (rubHeua, belonging to what is ruber)^ for which
the word Urra must be supplied.
Ob». 6. Here, also» must probably be referred adjectives in ^-Ictw, formed firom sub-
stantives : —
aqyot 1 Mqua^i ^,^.jaqua-4'\eu», belonging to water; living in
water : j water ; aquatic
n/«a,wood: ^t/va-t ....stZva^f-lctcs, belonging to a wood.
liomM, house: [domu»'(leu»\ ditwnef-f-fcMs, belonging to a house ; domestic.
rMi^ country: stu-t'leut, belonging to the country ; rostlc
06«. 7. To this class must also be referred the adjective amtieuSf otherwise written
(through the change of the c to the kindred qu) «uUiqmu»
antet before,) ante [on/e-i-cM],'^ belonging to what is before
(in time) : > ant-i-cus, >in time ; ancient.
or ant'i-quuSf j
B. SUBSTANTIVES.
1. onflf ety flik 3. Zf o-isv/. 8. 1-Zf I-o-to|/.
a. O-eiuh fl-ciy m. 4. e-<, X-c-lSi/.
There are also some Substantives of this class, which have, etymologically,
a participial force. They are Appellative Nouns, of which the etymological
meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to Boots, or the Eoot of Verbs.
..MAR mar-cm, Qhe crushing thing],
large hammer.
..sue suc-cus, Qhe moistening thing],
juice, sap.
1. MAS, akin to S.
V MRID, to
crush :
sue, akin to S.
v/ siTSH, to be
moist :
a.mando* to eat: mand mand-ucusy Qone prone to eat],
glutton.
Digitized by
Google
Ok. 1*3 ADJECTIYES AND BUBSTAKTIYES.*— Infl. Is, tam. etc. 57
3. WJL, akin to S. 1 fa. f^-Xf [[the shining thing^, torch.
>s/ BHA, to shine : J
4k. OORT. akin toS.lcOBT ccrt^e-x^ Qhe split thing]], husk
v' KRiT, to split : J or shell of fruits ; bark of trees.
rer^o, totum: vert vert-e-x'^y Qhe turning thing!,
whirlpool, eddy, etc,
S. ad, to; \ad 1 .,J[ad'pend-%'x'],'\ [[the thing hang-
penaeoy to hang: J fend J ap-pend-i-Xy > ing to^, append-
J age, appendix.
Obs. Substantives in e-x resume t in the oblique cases.
XVI.— DIMINUTIVES.
Diminutive words denote something small of their kind.
A. Adjectives.
1. Ins, la, liim« 3. I*ott-liis, l-cft-la« y-ott-lvm.
a. ett-lns, ott-lat ottluni. ^ s-il-liis, s-il-Iav s^-lmn.
Diminutive Adjectives are formed from other Adjectives on the same prin*-
ciples as Diminutive Substantives are formed from other Substantives. See
below No. B.
Obs, The Primary SuflSx is Zm : « is merely the nominative case-ending. In t-U-lus,
8 is euphonic.
1. borrVdnSv standing on "j horrtd-i 1 {horrtdd-ltis^y 1 standing
*'■">■ horrtdii'lus, J a little
J end ; projecting forth.
end : V {^horrido-Q f horrtdu-lus, J a little on
parvus^ smaill : parv-i
[joarvo-t*]]
paucus, few: pauc-i
^pnitco-t]
primus, first: prim'i
[j)rimO't2 .
^.^partyd'liis}* \yery small.
parvu'lusy J
... {jpaucd'lfis^ 1 very few.
paucu'luSi J
... [j9rmo-/i/«[], 1 very first.
primu'lus, J
* Sometimes written opftear.
Digitized by
Google
58 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. L
aurikts, golden: aurH-i 1... aureo-ltes, somewhat
fawrco-rj J golden.
benus, 1 beautiful ; 1 ben-i [ben-lus"], 1 pretty.
old form > good : J bel-lus, J
of bonus, J
miser, wretched: misir-i [inwcr-/t«], l very wretch-
misel-lus, J ed.
pulcer, beautiful: pulcr-i ^pulcr-lus'], 1 beautiful Ut-
\pulcer'lus\y V tie.
ptilcel-lusy J
fewer, tender : tin ir-i [tener-lus'], \ somewhat ten-
tenel'lus, J der.
06«. From some diminutive adjectives a second diminutive is fonned. (See
p. 62.)
iefftw, pretty : bell-i ^i7u- ^ux, pretty little.
pauxiUta^ very few : pauxill-i pauxiUu-hu, very few indeed.
a, pauperv poor: paupir-is ... pauper-culus, -poor little.
3. idTiSf trifling : ...' liv-is Hv-i-culus, Yery infLmg.
tristiSf sad : tristis : trist-t'CuluSy somewhat sad .
ft. paaonsf few : pauc-i pauc-s-illus, \ very few.
pauX'illtis, J
B. Substantives.
1, a. Ins, 111 m, d, fi. li-la* H-laB,/. e, y. (el-)liiin9 (el-)!!, n.
b. ImUfllvM. Y* A-liumftt-llf»* f. (ol-)la, (ol-)l8Br/.
0. leas, lei, m, e, a. (el-)la«, (el-)ll, m. gr, a. (ll-)la, (ll-)l8D /.
d, a. ft-lus, ft-li, mr /3. (el-)la, (el-)l8B,/. p. (U-)liim, (il-)ll, n.
Diminutive Substantives are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of
Substantives ; but in some cases, as in No, 2, a, to the nominative singular.
1. The Primary Suffix here is lus, la, lum, according to gender.
1. a, b. The instances in this class belong to the 2nd declension. If a conso-
nant precede the unelided Theme of the Substantive, o becomes u before the
Digitized by
Google
Ch. 1.3
ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIYES. — Ins, 11, eta
59
Suffix, as shown in equii'lus^ hinnu-lvs, etc. ; but if a yowel, then lus is joined
to the o, as in filio'lus. Corresponding changes take place for Substantives of
the Neuter Gender.
X, a. eavtuSf 1 eqU'i,
horse : J [cywo-i],
hinnuSy) hinn^i,
mule : j [Atn«o-i] ,
hortus, 1 hort'iy
garden : J [Aor^W],
servuSy'l serv-i
slave : J {^servd-t], ,
filtus, 1 filt-i,
son : J [^^t^-*]>
radius,! radt-i,
T&j : J [rac?to-t],
[^equo'lus^, \ IHtle horse.
equU'lus, J
[Atww W«*], 1 little mule.
hinnu'lus, J
[^hortd'lus'],
hortU'ltcs,
[^servd'lus'],
servu'lus,
little garden.
little slave.
filld'lusy little son.
radid'ltis, little raj.
1, b. oppldnm, town : ... oppid'iy
[opptdd-i],
rapum, turnip : rap-i,
Irapd't],
horreum, barn : horre'i,
[^horred't],
ingentum, talent : ingeni-i,
[ingenid't], ^
ostium, door : osti-i,
[^opptdd-lum"], 1 little town.
oppidu-lum, J
[rnpO'lum]', 1 little turnip.
rapu'lunif J
horred-lum, little barn.
ingenid'lum, small talent
ostid'lumy little door.
1, e. Here lua becomes leus bjr inserting e. The euphonic changes
mentioned in a, b* here again occur with Substantives of the 2nd declension ;
those of the 4th take the Suffix immediately after the unelided Theme.
equus, horse : egU't,
lequO'Q,
^m»M5, mule: hinn-i,
[^hinnO't],
[^egud'leus'], 1 little horse.
equii'leteSy J
[^hinno'ieus'], 1 little mule.
hinnu'leusy J
Digitized by
Google
60 LATIH 8nFFJXE& [Oa. L
aeus^ point; ae-us^ '^aeu-leus, little point.
If d. «, ^, Y* The Suffix is here added to the elided Theme of words of
the 1st and 3rd declensions bj means of the Connecting Vowel «.
l« df a. mdoleac«iiS9 1 ...adolegcent-iSy adoUscent-u-lus, little youth,
youth : J
infansy infant: infant'4s„.... infant-u4u8y little infant.
rexyking: rig-is reg-U'lm^ little (t. e. petty)
king.
^. ttreftf box: are-m are^-lay little box.
cistay chest: eUt-tB ci«^*«-/a, little chest.
literay letter : liter-iB liter-u-lay little letter.
lufuiy moon: lunr€e lun-^la^ little moon.
portcLy gate: ,part-{B , port-u^loy little gate.
radiXy root: rddic-is rddic-u-iay little root.
voXf voice : vdc-is voc-u-iay little (t. e, feeble)
voice.
y. eaputf head : capU-is eaptt-u-lumy little head.
If e, a, 3f Y* When the elided Theme ends in uZ, the u becomes e before
the Suffix : as, ttl-lusy eUlut; vJUoy el-la.
When the elided Theme ends in r or it, and those letters follow a conso-
nant, then e is inserted before the r orit, and such r or n becomes assimi-
lated to the following I: as, r-luSy er-hUy el'ltu; n-luniy en-lum, el-lum.
When the elided Theme ends in tn, or en^ or er^ the n or r become assimi-
lated to the following Z, and t is changed into e : as, in-lusy en4usy eldus ; en-loy
eUla; er-loy el-la.
If e* a. oatolnsf whelp : ca^-«/-t [^cat-ul-lus^, \little whelp.
cat-el-iusy J
dcutusy eye : oe-ul-i, [oc-wZ-Ztw], 1 little eye.
oc-eUluSy J
populuSy people : ... pdp-ul-i .....[j9op-w^Z««],
pop-el-lusy
cultevy knife: .... cult-r-iy
[cttUer-%\y
agevy field : ag-r-iy
little {u e. low)
people,
little knife.
[cult'er-lus'ly
cuU-el-luSy
[a^-cr-Zw*], 1 little field.
€tg-el-lu8y J
Digitized by
Google
<5h. I.]
ADJECTIVES ANP dUBSTANTIYES.— Ins, U, etc.
61
libery book : lib-r-iy 1 [W-cr-/t«], I little book.
[W-cr-i], J Itb-eUus, j
,JaS'in4us\ 1 little ass.
as-eUluSy J
ass
USy 1.
..• a«4ii-f
little tale,
little board,
very little box.
ver J little chest,
small metal plate.
0. fia»^Uat tale : ... fab'uU<B.». [/ab'ul^la]y '
Jab-el'la,
tabukty board : tah^til^m ...[to6-«/-fe],
tab^el'la,
areula, little box : are^uUm . ..[arc-u/-/a],
cistulay little chest : cisi^ul-a . .. [ci5^-fi/-/a], '
lamina^ 1 ... iam-tn-ce [lam^in^aX
ijaetal plate : J llam-en-la]^
lam-el-la,
pagtna^l pag4n^{B ...SpagMrlaX'
page : J [pag-en-lct],
pag-el^Oy
pattnaf\ pat-in'^ rpat4n-la\ "
dish : J \jpat'en4a]y
pat-^l'loy
catena,! cat-iU'ls ,.,.,. [^cat-en^la'},'
chain: J cat-el-la,
opera,\ op-er^a [c>p-er-ilfl], 1 little (i.e. slight)
work : J op-^el-la, J work.
little page.
small dish.
little chain.
}... flag-r-i, 1 {flag-erAum], 1 little scourge.
\Jlag'er'%\y f Jtag-eUlum, J
scourge
labrum, 1 lab-r -t, 1 [ lab^erAuni],
lip : J [^lab-er-i], J lab-elAuniy
sacrum, 1 sa-cr % \ [^sac-er-lum],
sacred thing : J [«a-cer-«], J sac-el4um,
scam-num^ \ ... scam'ti^, 1 {^scam-eu'lum
bench : J [*c«m-e«-t], J scam-el-lum^
little lip.
[small sacred
thing], a shrine.
, 1 small bench.
1, f. Also when the elided Theme ends in on, on becomes ol before
the Suffix: as, cn-lti, oUla.
eorSnm 1 cor-on^is \cor'On''la'], 1 small chaplet.
chaplet : J cor-oUla, J
Digitized by
Google
LATIN SUFFIXES.
[Ch. L
l-f ffy ^y ^' Occasionallj in an elided Theme ending in uL or iii, also in n af^er
a consonant, ti/, tn, n, become U before the Suffix : as, td-lus, iUlus ; in-lus^ il-
lus ; n-^tim, il'lum. See above, No, e.
walking stick:
pulvinus, cushion :
}
pugnusy fistful :
/s. •ignwBif mark :
bae-ul-i [bac-ul-lus^y 1 small walking
hac'il'lusy J stick.
pulv'tn-i ....[ptf/v-fn-/tt#], 1 small cashion.
pulv-U-luSy J
. pug-n-iy l..[p«^-t«-/M*],^ small fistful.
[pug'in-i\ J
stg-n-ij
[sig'tn^q,
tignum, beam: tig-n-i,
Itig-in^-i'],
pug-il'lusy J
sig-il'lumj
...[fy^-tn-/»i»], '
Hg-U'lum,
small mark.
small beam.
0&«. From some Diminntives a second Diminatiye is formed according to the fore-
going rules :
oaeZ/tM, little ass : cueU-i \ {^aseUd-lus'].
[««e//ff-i] j asellu-lus,
eistella, little chest: cistell-a cisteUu-la,
See also areeUti, dsteBa^ in page 61.
2. The Suffix here is ciilusy etc., according to gender.
2, a. When the nominative case singular of Substantives of the 3rd de-
clension ends in r, or in « as the representative of r, the Suffix is appended
immediately to the nominative singular witliout any change: as, dmdior,
drndtor-culus ; flos (Jhr-ii)^ floscubu. In the following exceptions, ciUus is
added to the unelided Theme.
Exceptions: —
linter^ bark : liiUr-iSy \ lintrx' cvlus^ little bark.
\lintH'is\yi
renter, belly : ventr-isj 1 ^?cw/r^cwZlw, little belly.
[ventri'is]^ j
o#, bone: oss^is, 1 o^^-cu/um, little bone.
[pss%'is]y J
a, a. amator, lover : amator-culuSy little lover.
fioSy flower: flos-cultiSy little flower.
fratevy brother : • . frater-culuSy little brother.
pulvisy dust: pulvis^iiluSy small dust.
rumor, report : [rM/wor-cw/ewr], "j small report ;
irumos-eulusj, >• gossip.
rumtiS'CultM, J
Digitized by
Google
Ch. I.] ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES.— Ins, II, ect 63
tnaier^ mother : mater-cula, little mother.
sonyTy sister : soror^cula^ little sister.
f/a:or, wife: uxor-cula^ little wife.
arboSf tree: [arbos-cala], 1 little tree.
arhuS'Culay J
coTy heart : cor~culum, little heart.
corpus, body : corpus'culum, little body.
munusygih: munus-culum, little gift.
filler, swelling : tuher-eulum, small swelling;
tubercle.
a, 1»« When words of the 3rd declension end in o, Xnis^ m. or f. ; en^ XniSy
m. ; o, dAt>, m. or f. ; the Suffix is appended to the elided Theme, while the i
or o, before n, becomes u : as, hamiu'ciUuSj homun-culus ; serman-ciUuSy ser-
mufi'Cultis,
]
2, b. liomoy 1
man: J
pecten, 1 .
scallop : J
Virgo,
maiden
pugto, 1
dagger : J
sermOi
talk
tiro,
beginner :
qucBstto,
question :
ratto,
reckoning
.,y
}
. homin-is . . . [Aomm-cu/t/«],
homun-cultis,
, .pectiri'is .... [pecHu'Culus'],
pectun-cHlus,
, virgiri'is .... {^virgin-eula ] ,
virgun-cUla,
little man ;
manikin,
small scallop.
1 little maiden.
small dagger.
8mall(i.e. idle)
talk ; rumour.
,,pugt5n'is ...[pugion-culus'],
pugiun-cUlus,
, . sermoTi'is .... [sermon-culus'],
sermun-culus,
. . ttron-is [tiron-ctdus^y 1 little beginner.
Hrun-cUlus, J
..qu(ESttdn'is,[^qucB8tion'CuIa'], \ little ques-
qucBstiufi'dila, \ tion.
. . ration-is . . . ^ration-cula], 1 small reckon-
ratiun-cHlOy Jing.
a* e. a, p. In words of the 5th declension the Suffix is appended to the
elided Theme ; and in such of the 3rd as end in es, to the unelided Theme :
as, die'Ciila, nube-cula,
a, o, a. dies* day : die-i dte-cula, little daj.
plehes, common 1 . . . plehhi plebe-cula little (i. e. petty)
people: J people; rabble; mob.
p. nubes, cloud :
. nub-is, "I ..
[«m6c-w], J
nube-cula, little cloud.
Digitized by
Google
64 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. L
vulpes,fox: vulp-isy 1... vif/p«-€«^ little fox.
[r«/pc-M], J
2« d. In parbyllabic Nouns of the 3rd declension ending in w, is; or e, }
it ; the Suffix is appended to the unelided Theme : as, igm^cidus^ reii'CvJtum, !
fire: ign^is^
[igni'is],
pisciSf fish : pisc^isy
4BdiSy house: ad-is,
[adi'is^i
pelliSf skin: pelUiSy
[peUt^isl
rete,nQti ret-is,
, igni^cubi
ignt'CuluSs small fire.
pisct-culusy little fish.
€Bd%-cula, small house
peUi'Culay little skin.
rett'cUlumy little net; (hence
reticule).
2| e. In imparisyllabic Nouns of the 3rd declension where the nominative
case-ending, t, is attached to a consonant, or where a consonant has been
omitted before it, the Suffix is added to the unelided Theme : as, pons, pontic
ctUus ; cos, coti'Cuia,
pons, bridge : pont-is,
[^pontt-is'],
dens, tooth : dent-is,
\denti'is'\,
pars, part : jpart-is,
\par tikis'],
cos, whetstone: cot-is,
[coti-isl,
pontt-culus, little bridge.
denti-cUltis, little tooth.
parfi-cula, small part.
coti-cula, small whetstone.
a, f. Words of the 4th declension change u of the unelided Theme into i
before the Suffix : as, artH'Ciilus, art-tcHlus,
artusf joint : art-us ,
sensus, sentence : .. sens-us,
[sensu'isi,
verstis, Terse : vers^us,
[yersu-is'\,
anus, old woman : anu-s.
..[arft<-cw/M«], 1 small joint.
artH'Culus, J
..,[sensu'Culus'\,\\iti\.e sentence.
sensi'ciilus, J
... [t>er*M-ctt/w*], 1 little verse.
verst'culus, J
.[^anu-cula'\, 1 little old woman.
ant'cula, J
Digitized by
Google
Cu. II.] ADJECTIVES. — ft-rlih A-re, etc. 65
genuy knee : genu {jgenu'culum^, 1 little knee.
genuculum, J
comuy horn : comu [comu-ct</tf}»], 1 little horn.
eomi'culum, J
Sv 8r* In some words of the 2nd declension the Dimiautive t'Cuhu is
Ibrmed by inserting f between the Suffix and the Base.
I^annns, piece 1 pann-i pann-i-cultis^ small piece of
of cloth : J cloth.
Obs, 1. The following are irregular formations : —
ramtu, branch : ramuscvhut little branch.
avusy grandfather : avunculus, uncle.
/ur, thief: fumnculus little thief.
caro^ flesh : carunculaf a small piece of flesh.
dnmus, house : domunctUa, small house.
Obs. 2. The following is irregular, both in formation and as to its deviation from the
gender of the primitive : —
rana (£), frog : ranunculus (m.), little frog.
CHAPTER II.
SUFFIXES BELONGING TO ADJECTIVES ALOKE.
I.
1. a-rls, &-re. ft. I-Ub* Y-le. 7. &-rYiis,ft-rYa,ft.rYiim.
a. ft-Us, &-le. 8. i-liSff i-le. 8. V-a-lis, Y-A-le.
3. S-lls, e-le. 6. u-lis, a-le. 9. ft-tl-Us, ft-4;Y-le.
Adjectives in d^ris, etc., derived from Substantives, point out, etymo-
logically, what "belongs,*' or "pertains," or "relates," to the primitive;
and hence, sometimes, what is in accordance with its character. Thus,
hostilis signifies, properly, " of" or " belonging to the enemy ;" and hence,
in a derived force, a quality such as an enemy has : " hostile."
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of the primitive.
F
Digitized by
Google
66 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. XL
Ob§, 1. The Primary SoAx it rt, « being the nominative case-ending : Hs' is obtained
from ru, by substitating one liquid for another, viz^ Z for r : riuM is obtained by insert-
ing « after i in r t « : all other parts of the above Suffixes are either Connecting Vowels
or angraentations of the Primary Saffix. Those Soffixes in which I occurs are mostly used
when the Base has no / in it ; if it contains I, then r is mostly substituted : thus, vUa,
vitdUs ; but, palma, palmaria. Yet when / in the Base is followed immediately by a
vowel, the I is used in the Suffix : thus, let-um, let-aKa ifiuci-us, flum-aUs, soAfluvi-ad&s ;
pluvi-a, fium-alu. In the Suffix r i « s, the r is used whether / has preceded it or not —
as, mUit-arius, anccr-ariut.
1. palma» a palm : .„ palm-iB palm-d-risy of a palm (in
lengthy &C.V
yy a palm-tree: ,, m of a palm-tree.
puellOy girl: puell-a pueU-a-ris, of or belonging
to a girL
^op«/tf«, the people : pdpul-i popul-d-riSy of or belonging
to the people ; popular.
vulguSy the com- 1 vulg^i vulg^d-ris, of or belonging
mon people : J to the common people ;
vulgar.
ron^tiZ, consul : consul-is coi»tf/-a-rt#, of or belonging
to a consul ; consular.
fnf/e^y soldier : mi lit 'is milit'd-ris, of or belonging
to a soldier ; military.
2. anoftra* anchor: ... ancor-as ancdr'd-lis^ pertaining to an
anchor.
a7t»ti«, year : anu'^i ann-d-lis^ belonging to a
year ; containing a year,
annual.
aquoy water: aqu-cB ctqu-d-lisy oi or belonging to
water.
conviva^ a table! convtv-iB conrir-a-Zts, belonging to a
companion : J table companion ; con-
vivial.
matrdnoy a matron : matrdfi'iB matron-d-lis, of or belonging
to a matron.
. ndturUy nature : ... ndtiir'<B ndtur-d-lis, of or belonging
to nature ; natural.
plUvia^ rain: pluvt'<B plUvi-d-lis, of or belonging
to rain.
rtto, life: vtt'€B tnt-d-lis, of or belonging to
iite; vital.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. II.] ADJECTIVES,— *^H», A-re, eta 67
letuniy death : let'i HM'liSy of or belonging to
death; deadly.
Jaium, fate: fai-i /at-a-lis, of or belonging to
fate ; fatal.
flumus^ river : flu vl-i fluvi'd-lis^ of or belonging to
a river.
comitia (plur.),l cSmtti-orum cJmlh'-a-/if, of or pertaining
the comitia : J to the comitia.
augury an augur: .. augiir-is augur-a-lis, of or belonging
to an augur,
caro, flesh: carn-is eam-a-lis^ of or belonging
to flesh ; carnal.
caputs head: cap it- is capU-d-liSy of or belonging
to the head.
corpus, body : corpor^is corpdr-d'-lis^ of or belonging
to the body ; corporeal,
/eor^law: leg-is leg-a-liSf of or belonging to
the law ; legal,
rear, king: reg-is re^-a-Zif, of or belonging to
a king ; regal.
sacerdosy a priest : sacerdot'is ,,., sacerddt-a-lisy of or belong-
ing to a priest ; sacerdotal.
3. fidesf faith : fid-ei fid-e-liSy [of or belonging to
faith], faithful
4. bttmiis, ground: ••• hum-i hum-t-lis, of or belonging to
the ground ; low ; humble.
5. caper, goat: capr-i capr-i-lis, of or belonging to
a goat.
ctvis, citizen : civ -is civ-Ulis, of or belonging to a
citizen ; civil.
hostis, enemy: host-is host-i-lisy of or belonging to
an enemy ; hostile.
juvenisy a youth: ... juvewis juven-i-Usy of or belonging
to a youth; youthful;
juvenile.
ovt>, sheep: ov-is oV't-lis, of or belonging to
sheep,
F 2
Digitized by
Google
68 LATIK SUFFIXES. [Ch. II.
pueTfhoji puer'i /wer-l-Zw, of or belonging to
a boj ; boyish ; puerile,
servus, slave: serv^i serv-t-lis, of or belonging to
a slave ; slavish ; servile.
anus, old woman: • an^us ...•••, an-i-lis^ of or belonging to
an old woman; old
womanish; anile.
6« trXbttSf tribe : trth-us ^rf^-v-Zti, of or belonging to
a tribe.
7. aneSrat anchor : ... ancdr'tp aneSr-d-rhUy pertaining to
an anchor.
anntis, jesLV I ann-i ann-d-rius, relating to the
year.
ogua, water: dqu-<B dqu-d-rtus, relating to
water.
mi^f, soldier : mWtt-is »ifi^f-a-rm«, of or belonging
to a soldier ; soldier-like ;
military.
cdrium, leather : ... edrt-i,^ edri-d-rtuSy pertaining to
leather.
ar^enft^w, silver :... argent-i argent-d-rttis, pertaining to
silver.
classisy 1 class-is, 1 ... c/o^^it-a-r^t/^^ pertaining to a
a fleet : J \classt'is'\ ] fleet.
j^a^ti^a, a statue : ... stdtu-ce ^/a^-a-riW, pertaining to a
a statue.
iumultus, tumult : .. . tumult-tis, 1 tumultu-d-riuSy of or belong-
\jtumultu^is'\ J ing to tumult.
vulgtis, the com- 1 vulg-i vulg-d-rms, of or belonging i
mon people : J to the common people ;
vulgar.
3. Judex* judge : judic-is judic-ud-lis, of or belonging
to a judge ; judicial.
adituSy a going to: adit-us adtt-i'd-lisy of or belonging
to a going to.
Digitized by
Google
Oh. II.] ADJECTIVES. — ft-rlfl, &-re, etc 69
^. ftqoa, water: dqu»<E aqu-a-ti-lis, of or belonging
to water.
JluviuSy river : Jiuvt-i „•., jfiuvi'd^ii'liSf of or belonging
to a river.
umbra, shade : umbr-ce umbr-d'ti'lis, [belonging to
the shade ; hence] retired ;
private.
Obs. 2. 3omd substantives occur in ariug, aria, arium,lle. Strictly speaking, how-
ever, these are adjectives, and are used substantively with reference to some word to be
supplied. (Compare Ch. L JV6, XIII., and Nos, III. and XII. below.)
a. iBrarius, of or belonging to <es, copper or money.
€Brdriua {faber), coppersmith, brazier.
„ (ctvts), citizen paying an <es, as poll-tax.
or aria {fodind), copper-mine.
„ (affieina), snkelting-house.
„ {fonuix), smelting-house.
isrdj^um {adificium), place where the public money was kept
b. argentar%u$j of OT belonging to argentum, silver.
argentdrius (homo), banker.
„ \faber), silversmith.
argentaria ^taberria), banker's office.
„ for*), banker's avocation.
n \fodvfid), silver mine.
argentarium (absolute), place for keeping silver ; plate chest.
c &v\dr%us, oi OT belonging to an aot«, or bird.
dvHarius (homo), person who keeps birds.
&vldrium ((BtUJicium), place where birds are kept ; aviary.
d. cdlumbarius, of or belonging to a columba, or dove.
columbarius (homo), man who keeps doves.
columbarium (axHJicium), place where doves are kept ; dove-cote.
e. pomdrius, of or belonging to /wrnvm, er fhiit.
pomdrius (homo), fruit-seller.
pomarium (juedifidum), fruit-house •, stooe-house for fruits.
„ (absolute), fruit-garden.
f. 8em%ndrXu9, oi or belonging to semitn, or seed.
seminarium (absolute), seed-plot.
g. iabuldrius, of or belonging to a tabuiOf or tablet
tabularius (homo), keeper of archives ; registrar.
tabularia (domus), record -office.
tabuktrium (absolute), archives.
h. valetudindrius, of or belonging to eaktudo, or iH health.
vaUtudinarius (homo), person in ill health ; invalid ; valetudinarian.
vatetudinarium {(oedificium), building for sick people ; sick-room ; infirmary.
k. vlvdrius, of or belonging to viva, or live animals.
vivarium (absolute), place for keeping live animals ; park ; preserve ; fish-pond, &c.
m. eaprilis, of or belonging to a caper, or goat
caprUe (stabiUum), goat-pen ; fold for goats.
F 3
Digitized by
Google
70 LATIN StrPFlXES. [Ce. IL
n. e i /t «, of or belonging to an oou, or sheep.
ifmle {atabSlumy, sheep-pen ; sheep-fold.
Ob9. 3. There are also neuter substantives ending in a/; or, which are evidently
the neater gender of adjectives in ttKs and aris, used absolutely, and slightly changed
by rejecting the final e. Such are, —
a. animalitf animate, living: xoumal-e : animSi, living thing; animaL
cSpltaH^ belonging to the head : cdpttdl-e : eapWU [thing belonging to the head],
head-covering for Roman priests.
cMfttta/if, belonging to the elbow: evbttal-e: eutlUdl, [thing belonging to the el-
bow], elbow-cushion.
p2^?a/M, belonging to a well : ,jmteal-e: pttteHl, [thing belonging to a well],
stone round well's mouth.
b.ptt/rtitanff, belonging to a cusUon:/»iiZvtitdr-e:/nf/Hn^&>, [thing belonging to a
cushion ], couch spread with cushions.
Obs, 4. There are also some substantives in ale, ar, arXus, avium. His, tie
evidently of an adjectival nature in an equal degree with the substantives mentioned
above, Obs, 2, 3 ; but which must be referred to other sources, as there is no adjective, in
the Latin authors, whose works have come down to us, from which they could be de-
rived. Such are,
ramus, a bough: ram-i ram-ale, twig.
coZar, heel: calc'it, ^ calc-ar, spur.
polumna, pillar : columti'iB , . column-aHus, a person exposed at the
Columna Migma,QX put in the pillory.
„ M eoltemn'orium, a pillar tax ; a stone
or marble quarry.
armamenta, implements: ,.,.armament'orvm.,,armamtvi'Wn!iim, an armoury.
arma, implements : ar m-orum arm-arium, a closet or cupboard.
planta, plant: plantne pkmt-aHum, a nursery ground.
6o«, a head of cattle: bdv-is Wj-i/i,, | ^nox-stalL
» ^''^* lanox-stall.
» f* bub-tle, )
iiquus, horse: iqu-i, ^-ile, a stable for horses.
eumbo, to lie down: cub cub-ile, a couch.
gSd^o, to sit: SEP sSd-Ue, a seat or chair.
/^po, to gather: l£o iSg-arium, pulse; legumes.
That these are of an adjectival nature, as above stated, appears both from a con-»
sideration of their meanings, and also from a comparison of them with words whosd
.primitive is an adjective in existence. Thus, compare calcar with puhnnar; columnd-
riu8 with argentaflus, &tfiaii.us, etc.; pUmtdrttim with s&fiAnarium; bulnle, ^quVe, with
caprUe, dvUe, And more particularly notice the retention of e in ratnale, cubile, and tedile ;
and, also, the feminine form bubilis.
There can be little doubt, when these things are taken into consideration, that the
foregoing come from adjectives which have disappeared from the written language.
To this it must be added, that their force becomes more perceptible, when an adjectival
form is assumed for their origin : thus —
tram-cUis, belonging to "| f ram-ale, thing belong- 1 ram-ale, twig,
a bough : J L ing to a bough J
tcalc'dris, belonging to"! fcalc-are, thing belong-l calc'or, spur,
the heel ; J L ing to the heel J
[ eolumn-arius, belonging to a pillar:] column-arius {homo), man exposed, etc
„ „ column-arium (cbs), pillar money ; a pillar
tax.
„ „ column-arium (absolute), place whence
materials for pillars were obtained; i.e,
stone or marble quarry.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. II.] ADJECTIVES. — Um, le, etc. 71
rarma.^.^^ belonging to i^V^^^^^'-J'^^t::^!^'^^^}^'^''^'-
|-«r».-a««. belonging to implemeou: ]-7„*:- S^^^^ '" '"^'"''
rp/ani-ortiM, belonging to plants: -IpUmt-arium (absolute), place for pUntsj
L J nursery ground.
tbSvUis or ftwA-i/w, belonging to cattle : Ibub-VU {caiJa), ox-sUU.
j6^»-t& or W6i/e («teW/um), ox-stalL
£ gqu'ilis, belonging to a horse : 'jSqu-ile {itabulum), sUble for horses.
rcu6-t/i», belonging to lying down: icub-iU (absolute), thing pertaining: to
L J ^y*"S ^"^° » couch.
r»«a-i/w, pertaining to sitting: liW-tfc (absolute), thing pertaining to sit-
L J ting ; seat ; chair, etc,
r/a;r-orri«, belonging to gathering: l^-arlwrn (absolute), thing pertaimng to
L J gathering ; pulse, legumes. .
IT.
1. Us, le. 3. bY-lU, M-le.
2. I-lls, Y-le. *. Y-M-lls* X-M-le.
Adjectives in lis, etc., derived from verbs, denote for the most part
" possibility ;" i. e. that something can be done. Sometimes, however, they
have an active force, and denote "the doing" something; sometimes a
passive force, and denote "that which is done;" sometimes a reflexive
force, and denote "that which one does to" or " for one's self."
They are formed by adding the Suffix either to the Root or the Theme of
the Yerb ; or, else, to the Theme of the Supine.
Obs, The Primary Suffix is Zi, •, being the nominative case-ending: U$ is, probably,
only another form of m {No. VIII. Ch. I.). Whatever is found, above, besides /w, is
merely an augmentation of the Suffix.
1. penetro. 1 penetra ».. penetrd-lis, penetrating;
to penetrate : J piercing.
a. iiffo, to put in 1 ag ag-t-lis, that can be put in
motion : J motion ; moveable.
doceo, to tewih : doc doC't-liSy that can be taught;
easily taught ; teachable.
fdcio, to do: ¥AC Jac-i-lis, that can be done;
easily done ; easy.
frangoy to break: fbaq frag-UiSy that can be broken;
brittle; fragile.
V 4
Digitized by
Google
72 I-ATIir SUFFIXES. [CH.iL
ttiOTy tonse: ut ti/-l-/if, that can be used ; use-
ful.
ago^ to put in motion : a& ag-t-lis^ that puts itself in mo-
tion; agile.
alo, to nourish : .a It -urn .... aU't-lis, that nourishes ; nou-
rishing.
Jero^ to produce : .fert-um,,. fert-t-Us^ that produces ; fer-
tile.
fluOy to flow : .flux-um... Jlux-Ulis, that flows ; fluid.
volo, to ^j: voldt'Um. void t-t'lis, thsit flies; winged;
flying.
versoy to turn frQ-lversdt'UmyVersdt'i'Us, that turns itself
quentlj : J frequently ; revolving ; ver-
satile.
^ncfo, to cleave : .fiss-um... fiss-t-lisy that can be cleft;
fissile.
^ec^, to bend: ,f lex- um ,.. flex- t-lisy that can be bent;
pliant ; flexible.
ahy to nourish : ali-um alt-i'lisy that is nourished ; fat-
tened.
cojtto, to prepare by 1 CO c^«»i •». coct'i-liSy that is prepared by
fire : J fire ; burnt
^»^o, to mould : fict-um .,., flct'i-lis, that is moulded;
fictile.
3. deleotOf to delight : .., delect a .... delecfd-bt^iSf that delights ;
delightful ; delectable.
penetrOy to penetrate : penetra „.. penetrd-ht-lisy that penetrates ;
penetrating.
fleoy to weep : fle fle-bt-Usy that weeps ; weeping.
versOy to turn fre- 1 versa versd-bt'lisy that turns itself
quently : J frequently ; revolving.
volvOy to roll : yolv [ro/t?-M-/w], 1 that rolls itself;
volu-bUliSy J revolving.
fleOy to weep for: fle. fle-bi-lis, that is wept for ; to
be lamented ; lamentable.
noscOy to obtain alNO .•••• nd-6We$y that of which a know-
knowledge : J ledge is obtained ; re-
nowned ; famous ; noble*
Digitized by
Google
C:^. H,] ADJEOTIYES.— lls,le, etc. 73
valvo, 1 VOLV [t7o/t;-W-/w], 1 that is turned
to roll : 3 vdlu-bi-lis^ \ round ; made to
^mo, to love : ama amd-bi-lis, that can beloved;
lovely ; amiable.
jyenetro, to ipeneiTVite: penetr a ,., penetrd-bUliSy that can be
penetrated ; penetrable.
j^roAo, to prove : •. ,pr6hd probd-bt'lis, that may be
proved ; probable.
deleoy to blot out : ^...dele • deli^-bt'lisy that can be blotted
out ; destructible.
moveoy 1 fMOY ..•.—••.[wiov-il-Zw], 1 that can be mov-
to move : y mo-bt-lisy J ed ; moveable.
. terreo, to frighten : ..tehr lcrr-t-W-/t>, that frightens ; ter-
rible.
horreo, to shudder at: horb. horr-i-bi'liSy that is shuddered
at; horrible.
cre^io, to believe : cred cred-t-bi-lis^ that can be be-
lieved; credible.
doceo, to teach : •- dog ddc'i-bx-lis^ that can be taught
teachable.
fZ^r, to use: •«• ut » ut-trbi'lis, that can be used
useful.
vendOyio^Wi vend vend-i-bt'lis, that can be sold
saleable ; vendible.
comprehendoy \co mp re hen s-um, comprehens-t-bt'lis, that can be
to lay hold of : J laid hold of; comprehen-
sible.
divtdo, to diYidt : divts-^m,.. (UviS't-bhlis, that can be di-
vided ; divisible.
Jlecto, to bend : .flex*um .... ^^lex-i-bt-lis, that can be bent ;
flexible.
p/rridfo, to applaud : plaus-um.., plattS't-bt-liSyihskt can be ap-
plauded ; deserving applause.
Digitized by
Google
74 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch.1L
ni.
1. eSnSf efof oivm. *. eYus* ela* eYmiLi
2. ft-elSiiSy ft-edftv ft-eSmn* 5. i-olusy i-ola* i-oYum.
3. 1-oduSy I-ote» Y-o4Siiiii« : w i^Yiuh i-^Iat i^Imn.
Adjectives of this class are obtained from Substantiyes, Verbs, and Adjec-
tives. Here also must be referred a deriyative of the Adverb prope.
When obtained from Substantives thej denote, etymologicallj, **made
of,*' or " done by," or " springing *' or *' arising from," their primitive ; and
hence, sometimes, in a derived force, the *' belonging " or '* pertaining " to
such primitive.
When obtained from Yerbs they denote, etymologically, the ** producing;"
the "being produced by" or "made of;" the "springing from," their
primitive ; and, hence, point out a quality of which the etymological meaning
is descriptive.
When obtained from Adjectives they have the same force as such Adjec-
tives; the notion of "springing from" here pointing necessarily t6 a
similarity of character, etc.
When obtained from an Adverb the Adjective denotes, etymologically,
" springing from that which is in the condition," e/c, which the Adverb
signifies ; and, hence, points out a quality of which the etymological meaning
is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives, and
of the Supines of Verbs ; sometimes to the Themes of Verbs ; and by
eliding the last vowel of prope before the Connecting Vowel of the Suffix.
Obi, 1. The vowel t, at the beginning of i-t^iuB, and the vowel a, in a-ceus, are
Connecting Vowels.
06s. 2. Adjectives in chts are formed from substantives of the 1st declension, by
adding the Suffix to the unaltered Theme, — as, charta, charta-i, charta^ceus ; bat those
in a-ceu8 are formed from substantives of other declensions, in imitation, apparently,
of the preceding formation, — as, papyrus, papyr-i, papyr-a-eeus.
Obs, 3. The quantity of the Connecting Yowel i in i-cHus (also written i-tlus) is un-
certain. Words of this class do not commonly occur in poetry ; and where they are
found, the poets appear to have lengthened or shortened the t, as it suited their purpose.
Martial (5, 24, 8) has aupposit't-tius ; Terence (Eunuch. 8, 5, 34,) and Juvenal (3, 265)
have nov-i-ciu8. On the other hand Ovid (Tristia, 4, 10, 46) has aodal-i-tius, Plautus
(Capt. 4, 2, 48) cuUl-X-Hus; and Juvenal (14, 332), Persius (1, 61), Statins (Silvaa,
i, 4, 97), have/Ni<r-¥-cit».
Digitized by
Google
Cb« II.] ADJECTIVES.— oSns, ote, o«iim, etc 75
X. oliartaff paper : ...cAar^a-t* charta-ceus^ made of paper.
ro^a, rose : rosd-i* rosd-ceusy made of roses,
argilla, d&j : argilld^i* argilld-cetiSy made or con-
sisting of clay ; clajej.
galllna^ a do-1 ...gallind-i* gallind-ceuiy [springing
inestic fowl : J from gallirug]^ belonging
to domestic fowls ; galli-
naceous.
Tnembrdna, skin : ...membrdnd'i*,, membrdnd-^eus, made of
;^ skin ; also, resembling
skin.
ampulla, flask : a mp ulld'i'^ ampulld-ceusy [springing
from a flask], resembling
a flask.
a. papfmSi paper : ..papyr^i papgr-d-ceus, made of paper.
hordeum, barley : horde 'i horde-d'Cetis, made of barley.
3. panis, bread: pan-is pan-t-ceus, made of bread.
4u natrlOf to nourish inutri nutri- ctus, [producing the
nourishing or nourish-
ment]], nourishing.
6. caementam* 1 ,.,c{sment'i cament'i-eitis, made of
quarry stone : J quarry stone.
later, brick : later -is later-i-ctus, made of brick.
stramentum, sir&w istrament-i ... strameni't-ctiis, made of
straw.
€BdUis,edi\ei adil-is <s(fi7-t-ctt<^, pertaining to an
edile.
trtbunus, tribune : trtbun-i tribun'ucius, pertaining to
a tribune,
pa^r^f, senators : ...patr-um patr-i^citis, pertaining to
senators; patrician.
novQs^new: nov-i nov-i-cius, new,
vendlis, for sale : ...vendl'is vendUi-ctus, for sale.
* Old (JenitiTe Cases, for the common charta, rottB, argiUc^ etc.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
76 -LATIN SUFFIXES. CCh. 11,
. prope, near : .prop-e prop-i-ttusy [springing from
that which is near (in feel-
ing)]], favourable, pro-
pitious.
uAwhnto^ioKmY^i advent'um advent-i-ctus, [produced by
arriving], that has come
from without.
comminiscor, to\comment' um . . . comment-i-ciuSy [produced
devise : J bj devising], devised.
confefOy to contii-lco lid t'Um coUat-i-ciuSy [produced by
bute : J contributing], contributed.
dedo, to Burrender: dedtt'um dedit-i-ctusy [produced by
surrendering],surrendered.
inseroy to insert : ,.,insert' um insert-i-ciuSy [produced by
inserting], inserted.
st^doy to auh' 1 ...subdit-um subdit^i-citis, [produced by
stitute : J substituting], substituted.
supponoy to putlsuppdstt'um .,. supposit'i-citiSyl^prodiicedhy
in the place of : J putting in the place of],
supposititious.
' 06«. 4. Substantives occur, which end in some of the foregoing adjectival Suffixes.
Strictly speaking, however, they are Adjectives, in concord with some word to be
supplied.
dedititiua, surrendered.
deditititu («c. homo), a person who has surrendered.
novicius, new.
novicius («c. Aomo), a new comer ; a novice.
nutritiug, nourishing; also, rearing or bringing up.
nutrUius (scJ homo), one bringing up (a child) ; tutor.
nti^rt^ <B, f, (ac madier), one bringing up (a child) ; governess.
nutriiia, €t,f. (sc mtc/ter), one nourishing (a child) ; nurse.
nviritiwai, t, n. (absolute), that which is nourishing ; nourishment.
nutaiHoy OTMM, n. (abflolute), wages for nourishing ; nurses' wages.
IV.
1. tY-Bii0« fX-tta» tl-niim« a. tl-nns, ti-aa* tS-w
Adjectives in tX-mu, etc., etymologically denote ** belonging to" that,
which their primitives signify.
Digitized by
Google
Oh. II.] ADJEGTIYES. — tV-nns, tY-oa, tl-iiwn, eta 77
Thej are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Verbs, the Theme of
Substantives, or to Adverbs without change.
Obs, Words of this kind mostly relate to Time.
3i. airniu, year: ••• ann-i, 1 anno-ti-nuty of or belonging to
\jinnd'%\ J a (complete) year, a year old.
eras, to-morrow: cras'ti-ntis, of or belonging to to-morrow.
diu, for a long time: ... dtu-H-nus, of or belonging to a long time.
priSf before "1 pris't^-nus, of or belonging to before; for-
(obsolete) : J mer ; ancient.
a. Tesper* evening : vesper^i ... vesper-it-nus, belonging to the
evening.
Matutay Matuta, god-
dess of morning :
feror, to bear one's
self along :
Matut-a ... \matut-t%'nu$\^ 1 belonging to
matU'ti-nus, J Matuta; early.
FER Q/er-<i-ntw]],1 [[belonging to
fes*tunus*y I bearing one's
j self along],
J quick^ rapid. .
Obs. Probably hester-nutf ater^ut, Mn^/fer-nttt, are to be plaeed in this class; but
their formation is doubtful.
V.
1. bniidiui, biinda, Irandimi. 3< Y-bundiiSi Y-bnndmt V«biui4viii.
Zm S-bundiuiy S-bunda, S-bundmii*
Adjectives of this class have a strengthened meaning of the Present
Participle of the Verbs from which they are derived.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root, or to the Verbal
Theme.
Obs. Some few adjectives have the direct power of a participle : as, vkabunAu eattra,
Liv. 25, 13; vitabundus clastem, Sail. Frgm. p. 213 Eritz: nudiiabundu» beUunij
Justin, 38, 3.
1. edfflto, to think : ... cogitd eogita-bundus, thinking
much ; full of thought.
deliberOf to deli-1 deliberd deliberd-bundut^ d^iberat-
berate : J ing deeply.
• Compare /«r-ojr, p. 66,
Digitized by
Google
78 LATIN SUFFIXES. CCh. XL
erro, to wander : ... erra erra-bundus, wandering to
and fro.
gratuloTf to con-l gratuld grattUa-bundtis^congrBXixlsitr
gratulate : J ing much.
A<s«tifo, to hesitate : htesita A<bH^-6«iuImj^ greatly hesi-
tating.
lacrpmOy to weep : laerymS lacryma-bundus, bursting
into violent weeping.
miroTy to wonder : mir& mird-bundus, full of wonder.
wncror, to re- 1 ... venerd ..,* venera-bundus, greatly re-
verence : J verencing.
a. fMbno« to mutter : fbem frem-e-bunduSy muttering
deeply.
gemo^ to groan : oem gem-e-bunduSf groaning
deeply.
3. fttro, to rage : .n fur fur-i-bundus, raging greatly.
ludo, to play: lud lud-hbundusy playing much.
mfor, to strive : nit tut-t-bundus, striving
greatly.
/)ti(^ee>, to feel shame : pud pud-Ubundus, \^eB.t\j feel-
ing shame], hashful ;
modest.
lascivto, to he \ lasciv ... 2a»ctt7-t-d«nJi», greatly wan-
wanton : J toning.
VI.
1. eundiiaf onnda* eandain. 2. Y-emidiiaf Y-emtdrnt Y-emidiiin.
Adjectives in cundus, f-ctciuftM, denote an "abounding in/* or "having much
of* that, which their primitive implies.
They are formed from Verbs by adding the Suffix to the Boot or Verbal
Theme.
1. iraaoor, to be 1 iRA ird-cundusy very angry;
angry : J wrathful.
farif to speak : fa /d-cundus, that speaks
fluently.
Digitized by
Google
CI^H. 11. ] ABJECTIYES. — tJw9Mf tlva, tiTniiit'eto. 7 9
juvo, \ juv ^juV'Cundtis^i^ pleasing
to please : J ju'cundusy }- greatly ;
J delightful.
y^, akin to S. 1 Jo jd-cundus^ sporting much;
^ Dju, to sport : J mirthful.
vereor, to feel 1 vere vere-cundtUy feeling much
shame : J shame.
2. rttbtef to be red : rub rub-t'cundus, very red;
ruddy.
VII.
1. tiTiuh tiira, tlvuMMk* S. T-^tXnUf T^tlira, T-^lFiim.
Adjectives in tivus, etc., have, etymological ly, a participial force, some-
times active, sometimes passive : and hence point out a quality of which the
etymological meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Boot or Verbal Theme.
Obs, The Primary Suffix is tlv m-« ; the first t in l-M v tc « ia a Connecting Vowel ;
si VMS arises from assimilation.
tojoin together:/ conjunc-tivtu, Igether;
I connect-
doy to give: i>a da^HvuSj giving.
adjtciOf \ ADJic [at(/tc-^iri«], "1 added; (hence)
to add : J adjec-ttvus, J adjective.
capio, to take : cap cap-tivus, taken ; capt i ve.
wa*cor, to be born : ,..NA na^tivus, born (in a parti-
cular place) ; native.
SA, root preserved 1...SA , sa-tivus, sown,
in sero to sow : J
subjunoy I SUB Jic \mbjic'ttvus]y 1 [laid under],
to ky under: J sub^ec-iivus, J subjective.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
80 ItATIN SUFFIXES. [0:0* IL
a. atofttoTv I ...ABUT • [abut'tivus\ 1 misapplied ;
to misapply : J labiis-sivus], > misused.
(ibu-sivus, J
3. geno. to beget : gen gen-i-tivus,
vin.
!• en-siSf en-«e« a. Y-en-siSt I-en-se.
Adjectives in «int, etc., mostly denote "b^ng in" or "belonging t© ** a
place.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Hieme of Substantives.
Obs. 1. The Suffix i-entu is xnostl/ found in words derived from names of countries
or cities.
1. elrewh circus: cire-i ctrc-ensis, belonging to the cir-
cus.
castrunif camp : castr-i ca^/r-en^, belonging to acamp.
f^rum,ioT\xm\ .for-i n for-ensis, belonging to the fo-
rum.
Aor/u«, garden : hort-i hort-ensis, belonging to a
garden.
lutum, mud: lut-i lut-ensisy in, or found in, mud.
nemus, grove : nemd r-is . . . nemor-ensis, belonging to a
grove.
Circeiif Circeii: .....Circei'Orum, Cired'ensiSy belonging to
Circeii.
Hispdma, Sj^2Lm:.,.,Hispdni'CB., Jrispdm-ensiSf belonging to
Spain.
Melitay Malta : MilU-CB Meltt-ensiSf belonging to Mai t a.
Zm Atb»mxt Athens z.,. At hen^rum, Athen-t-ensiSf belonging to
Athens.
Babplon, 'Babylon i.Bdb pi dU'ts , Babpldn-tensiSy belonging to
Babylon.
Carthago y Carthage : Ca r thdgin^is Carthagin-i-ennSy belonging to
Carthage.
Rhddosj^ Rhodes : . . . Rhdd'i BAdd-i-ensis, belonging to
Rhodes.
Digitized by
Google
^H. II.] ADJECTIY£S. — 6as, te, tnn, etc. 81
Oft». 2. Some sabstantives in «imm are found which evidently were originallj- adfec-
tives, although in the Latin works that have come down to ufl they do not appear in an
adjectival form. Such are, —
a/rfttm, court of houee : atri-u aM-entis, [belonging to court of
house], keeper of the olriMm.
commentarius, note-book: comment a rl-t commentSfi-ennt, [belonging to note*
book], secretary ; registrar.
/a&r¥ca, work-shop : ,fabr\c-<B fabric-eMU, [belonging to work-
shop], work-man.
libeUus, petition: libell-i. Afte/7-«nm, [belonging to petitions], an
officer who presented petitions to the
emperors, and registered them.
^.B. Compare No. I. Obs. 2, and No. XII. Obs. 1, of this Chapter.
IX.
1. Sus, ISa* Sum. 2. t-Sns, t-l^at t-lhun.
Adjectives me us signify, etymologically, a* ** a pertaining to ** something ;
hence, in a derived sense, b, **tbe consisting or* something ; o, ''the being
made" or *' composed of" something; d« "the resembling" something in
some part of its nature.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives.
1, a. eitnu, the citrus 1 Cf7r-t citr-Hus, pertaining to the ci-
tree: J trus tree.
corpus^ a body : .... corpdr-is .... cwp^r-^tw, pertaining to abody.
aer, the air: aer^is (zer-^us, pertaining to the air.
rosuy a rose: ros-ise ros-^usy pertaining to a rose or
roses.
virgoy a maiden: .... virgtnns .... i;tV^lf»-^u«> belonging to a maid-
en.
b. bums, a box-tree : bux-i bux-^us, consisting of box-trees.
iffniSf fire : ig n-is ign-^us, consisting of fire.
corpusy flesh: corpdr-is .... corpor'^us, consisting of flesh.
e. ar§r9iitiiin« silver: argent-i argent-^us, made of silver.
arundOy a reed: arundtn-is . arundin'cus, made of reeds.
auruniy gold: aur^i aur-^us, made of gold.
buxus, box- wood :,„bux'i bux-^us, made of box- wood.
G
Digitized by
Google
82 LATIN SUFFIXES. . [Ch. IL
cUruSf citrus wood: citr-i citr'^uSy made of citrus wood.
ferrum, iron: ferr-i ferr^^us, made of iron.
lignum^ wood: lign-i ,. Ogn-^tu, made of wood.
plumbum^ lead: ..••. plumb-i plumb-^usj made of lead.
vUrumy glass: vitr-i viir-^us^ made of glass.
rosci^ a rose: ros-^ ros-itiSf made of roses.
. gold : aur-i aur-etis, like gold ; gold-colour-
ed.
arundoj a reed: arundin-is arundtU'eus, reed-like.
ignis, fire : ig n-is igu'ius, fire-like (of colour).
y, „ „ yy fire-like, resplendent;
„ „ „ „ fire-like, burning.
buxusy box- wood : . . . bux'i bux-euSy like box- wood ; pale
yellow.
cintSy ashes : cin ir-is ciner-iusy like ashes (in colour) ;
grey; cinereous.
a. lUimn, flax : Hn-i lin-t-euSy [[made of flax]], linen.
Obs, In Kn-t'ius the t is eaphonic.
1. dftiis, 5sa, Strnmrn a. Y-teiis, Y-Smu I-dsnm*
Adjectives in osuSyi-osuSy signify the ** being full of,** or "abounding
in,** that which is denoted by their primitive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives, mostly
without the Connecting Vowel f.
Obs, Words irom the fourth declension of substantives end in ii'osus. The «,
however, is part of the Theme, and is obtained by inflecting the substantive after the
original and nncontracted mode : viz., saUua; salt&is, contracted, stdtus. The geni-
tive anuis, of an old woman, is found in Terence.
N.B, 1. Mon§trum, on evil omen; monstr-i: monffr-oftM, full of evil omen : monstr''U-
osuso preternatural ; monstrous.
The first form above given, viz., moiM^oMM, is formed in the usual way: monstr^
ttosus, the other form, is obtained probably from the nncontracted genitive case, and by
the substitution of « foro; thus, tnonttri^morutrd-i ; monstru-i; whence is obtained
fiwnstrii'osus,
N.B, 2. The word tempettuotua (abounding in storms, tempestuous) is fomid in late
Latin once or twice. Its primitive is ten^testat; and therefore it must either be re-
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IL] ADJ£CTiy£S.— lentoa, toats. lentiim, etc. 83
gax<dtod as a wholly irregular form, or elae the formation takes place from the unoon-
tracted fonn of the genitive, together -with the sabstitation of u for t; and farther, b^
the elision of a syllable ; thus, tempeKtatu » tempmUOi'is : whence is obtained tempeataii"
08US, tea^estatH'Oius : and thence again, by elision, tesipestiS-onif.
1. eemniiiay trouble:... arumn-a.,, arumn^osuSy full of trouble.
dnimtiSi courage : ••• dntm'i dnini'dsuSf full of courage.
artiftcium, art : artifici'i ... arti/tct'OsuSf skilful.
fTi^entt/m, ability :«.. t»^ en t-i ingifnMsuSj full of ability;
ingenious.
Zt6tc2b, passion : Itbidin-is..,, libidin-^sus, full of passion;
libidinous.
an^UiOy ambition i,.,ambUt6n'is {^ambiiidn'Osus'], 1 full of ambi-
ambUiO'SuSf J tion.
supersiUiOy super- \sup€rsti-\ [jsuperstttiidh-^sus]^ 1 full of super-
stition. J tidn-is J superstitw-suSf V stition; su-
J perstitious.
actus J the doing of lact-us,
a thing. J [ac^tt-«>],
portusy harbour : . ... port-uSy
\jportu-i8\
saltus, forest : acdt- us,
vuUuSy expression 1 vult-usy
of countenance : y[vultU'%s']y
actU'OsuSy full of the doing of
a thing ; very active.
partu-osuSy abounding in har-
bours.
saUu'dsuSy abounding in fo-
rests.
vultU'OsuSy full of or attended
with much expression of
countenance.
a. l&bor» labour : lab 6 r-is lahdrA-dsuSy full of labour ; la-
borious.
XI.
1. lentiiSf lentSv leBtom. «. 6-leiui, S-lentU.
2. 6-lentiuif 6-leBtSv 6-lentiiin. 8. tt-lens* tt-lentU.
3. tt-lentiuh tt-lentSv tt-lentam.
Adjectives in lentusy etc., mostly signify ** abounding in** or ** being full
of** a thing; yet sometimes they denote a " being fit.**
They are formed from Substantives by adding the Suffix to the Theme.
Ohs, The Primary Snffix is /entu, « being the nommative case-ending; /en« is ob-
tained by striking out t and u, and retaining the nominative case-ending «. In u-ltntf
le m, U'lentus, d-lentus, u and o are merely Connecting Vowels.
Q 2
Digitized by
Google
84 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. 1L
Lpdettlun, draught: ...pocul-i .... [pdcul4enttis]j 1 fit for drinking;
pdcii'lenius, J drinkable.
2. Mutfuls, blood : sanguin-'is sangutn-d-lentus, full of blood.
vinum, wine: vin-i vin-O'lentus, full of wine; in-
toxicated.
vis, violence: vi^s vt'O-lenius, violent.
3. emrpiiSv body corpdr^ %8....\corpdr'U'lentu8] , 1 having a
corp'U'lentus, > (large) body;
J corpulent.
frausy deceit: .fraud -is..., fraud-u^lentus, deceitful.
^^pe«, riches : dp -urn ^-t«-/enfc«^, rich ; opulent.
pulvis, dust: pulv^r-is.,., pulver-u-^erUuSy very dusty.
(urba, disturbance : ..turb-cR turb'u4enttiSyi\})\ of disturbance ;
turbulent.
esca, food : esc-cB esc-u-lerUus, fit for food; escu-
lent.
po^^, a drinking:. ..../>() ^-t^ pot-u-leniusy fit for drinking ;
drinkable.
«. Tim violence : vi-s vi'd4efis, violent.
5. ^es, riches: op'um op-U'lens, rich} opulent.
XII.
Ins, Ittf Ymn.
Adjectives in in s denote, etymologically, a *' belonging to " some person
or thing ; but, in a derived force, some quality of which the etymological
meaning is descriptive.
They are chiefly obtained from Personal Substantives in tor or tor, though
occasionally from a few others, and are formed by adding ttt« to the Theme
of the primitive.
aocasfttor» an SLC'laccusdtdr'is, accusator'tus, of or belonging
cuser : J to an accuser.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. II;] ADJECTIVES. — ^Xmn, la, Inm. 85
dl^dior^ a gambler:... a /^a/or-tV.«. aUdtorAui^ of or belonging to
a gambler.
amatory a lover: dmdtor-'is*.* amatorAuSy of or belonging to
a lover : amatory.
censor^ a censor : censor-is ••.. censorAuSy of or belonging to a
censor; severe.
imp^rdtoTy^i {iom'\impirat6r''is impirdtor-iuSy of or belonging
mander : J to a commander.
prcetory a praetor: ,,. prtBtor-is ... praidr-tusy of or belonging to
a praetor.
nugatory a trifler: ...nuffdtdr-is,.. nugdior-iusy of or belonging to
a trifler; worthless; nugatory.
soroTy a sister: sdror-h sdror-iusy of or belonging to a
sister.
tonsory one 1 tonsor-is ... tonsdr-iusy of or belonging to
wbo shaves : J one who shaves ; tonsoriaL
uxoTy a wife: uxor-is uxdr-tusy of or belonging to a
wife ; attached to a wife ; ux-
orious.
dquiloy the north: ... a qut Ion-is . dqutldn4uSy of or belonging to
the north ; northerly.
pdtery father: patr-is patr-tus, of or belonging to a
father; paternal.
re^, aking: reg-is reg^ttiSy of or belonging to a
king; regal; royal.
Obt. 1. Some Substantives in ius, la, turn (principally those fonned from Substan-
tival Themes ending in tor) are, strictly speaking, Adjectives, and must be referred to
some Substantive understood. Such are,
dmatoriMis, of or belonging to ti\„..dmator'%um (medicamenium), an amatory or love po-
lover; amatory: j tion.
alSatoHu», of or belonging to a) alSStor-lum (adijieiiim), a gambling-house.
gamester : j
a«<It(or¥i<«,of or belonging to a).... atM2t^or-Y«m^(<M2i/!cttim), a place for hearing; an
hearer ; relating to hearing : I f assembly-room or lecture- hall.
„ ^absolute), a judicial investigation or
) hearing of a cause.
pratoHuSy of or belonging to a) ....prtetor-ius (homo), a man of praetorian rank ; an ex-
pnetor: f pmtor.
„ n ..../>r<e<or-lvm (fantorttcm), a prsdtor's tent
uxoriuSf of or belonging to a) ....uxor-Itun (<es), wife-money; «'. e. a tax laid upon
wife: I bachelors ; bachelor tax.*
r^tus, of or belonging to a) ....r^ia (cfomiM), a kingly house; a palace,
bng; kingly; /
„ .... » (w6«), a royal city; a capital.
N.B» Compare above, No, I. 06«. 2.
* See Festus, p. 379 ed. Mttller.
G 3
Digitized by
Google
86 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch« II.
OU, 2. To thJB class also belong some proper names in mm, ui. Such are,
moi, male: mar-u JfoH-ttf fbelonging to a male], Marina.
octatmt, eighth : oetav-i Oefa«l-««\ [belonging to the eighth], Octa-
Octool-a j yios, Octavia.
Obt. 3. Perhaps also here should be pUbced the feminine names of coontries. Sach are,
Br ita m n it, Briton ; ^ritann-i... Britann-^ country belonging to the Britons;
Britannia.
Oalhu, a Gaul: Gall-i Gaff-lo, country belonging to the Gauls; Ganl.
Crr«eiM, a Greek : GrtBc-i. Gr«e-la, country belonging to the Greeks;
Greece.
XIII.
I or.
Adjectives in C'S-tu denote a quality descriptive of the nature of t-heir
primitive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives.
mgeTf country : agv'i .... agr-e'S-Hs, country-like ; rastio.
cesium^ heaven : cosl'i ccel-e-s-tis, heaven -like ; hea-
venly.
OU. 1. The Suffix is represented by some philologists as being strictly It ; the ^
being a Connecting Yowel, and the first « euphonic, wmle the second s is the nominative
case-ending.
Obi, 2. One great modem philologist, however (Pott), considers sh' to be the Suffix,
and connects it with the Sanscrit sta, to stand. According to this view, the meaning
of the above-given words will be, ** standing in the country,** hence, ** rustic,"— ** stand-
ing in heaven," hence, ** heavenly." If this be so, sUs = Latin Attu,
XIV.
\»ttan»m9 Y-tlnuif Y-tYmum.
By means of the Suffix i-ftmus Adjectives are formed having the force of
" closely connected with '* or " bordering upon.'*
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives.
flnlst border : .fin -is fin-t-HmuSy bordering.
lexy law : legits . . . legA^ttmus^ lawful ; legitimate.
mare^ sea: m&r'is.,., mar-i-ttmus, connected with, or
near the sea ; maritime.
Digitized by
Google
Ca. II.3 ADJEOTIYES. — tau> bm taUf etc 87
XV.
1. bii«» ba« biun. a. e-r-bns, e-r^-bAt e-r^bmn.
Adjectiyes in bu'S, etc., according to their etymology*, signify '^tbe
being " that which their primitire signifies.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to Uie Theme of Adjectlres, to the
Koot of Verbs, or to Adrerbs themselves.
Obs. In cte-e-r-bus {No. 2), e is a Connecting Yowel, and r is enphonic. Compare
lite'e-r-na. Chap, I. No. XIII. B. 8 ; and A 6, Aodt-«-r-nM.
1. pro, before: .pro pro-bus, Qhat is before^) good>
excellent.
superiis,\ super-i super-bus, Qhat is high (in
high : J mind)^ proud ; haughty.
2. aetto, to make I AC ac'e-r-bus, Qhat is made
pointed : J pointed ; bence^ harsh.
XVI.
Gntts appears to be a contraction of genus, = gbn, Root of gigno + the
Suffix Its. There are only some few Adjectives with this termination, which
ought perhaps to be referred, strictly speaking, to the head of Compound
Words. Such as are found, however, ending as above, denote, etymolo-
gically, when derived from Adjectives, the " being born " in the condition
betokened by the primitive; but when from Substantives, the *^ being
sprung" from that which the primitive signifies ; and, hence, point out some
quality of which the etymological meaning is descriptive.
They are formed from Adjectives by adding the Suffix to ^e Theme.
N.B. Compare Substantives in ffo, Chap. III., No. XY.
beniia = bonus, good :..,ben'i ben- i-gnus, [^born good]], bene-
volent.
malus, bad: mal-i mal-i-gnus, []born bad]], malig-
nant.
* Sanscrit, bh^ to be.
a 4
Digitized by
Google
88 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ca. IIL
' aper, wild boar : apr-i apr-u-^us*, [[sprung from a
wild boar], of or belonging
to a wild boar.
abies, fir-tree: aite^-w,...[aWe/-^nt«],l [sprung from ;
abie-gnus, > hence], made
J from a fir-tree.
06«. There are two substantiyes ending respectiyely in ^p^u and gwiy which are
evidently of an adjectival nature : theee are,
jortoM, separate : priv-i prw^-gnut, [one bom separately, ue. of a
different stock] ; step-son.
„ „ ,t priv't-gna, [one bom separately, i.«., of a dif-
ferent stock] > step-daughter.
CHAPTER IIL
SUFFIXES BELONGING TO SUBSTA:NTIVE8 ALONE.
I.
1. o, 5ii-lSf m. 8. oii*Yiia, on-Yi, m,
a. I-o, Y-5ii-ls««i». tf- on-Ya, on-ln,/.
3. tt-o» tt-dn-lSf M. 7. en, Yn-ISv m.
4. 5ii-iaif 5ii*it m.
Sabstantiyes in o, onis^ etc., haye, etymologically, a participial force, and
represent agents performing the action of the Verbs from which they^are
derived.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Verbs.
1. bYbOf to drink : bib btb-Of [the drinking one]],
drunkard.
cachinnor^ to laugh : ..cachinn .... cachinn-Oy the laughing one.
cotnmilitOf to fight 1 GOMMILIT... commiltt-o^ [the one fighting
together with ano- [ (in conjunction) with ano-
ther: J ther], comrade, fellow-sol-
dier.
* At Solinns, 32, 30, the extended form aprugineus is found : h^)popotamos . . . un-
gulit lifidisj apruginei* dent&uaj cauda tortuota.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IU.] substantives. — o, •B-lii« etc 89
ee2o, toeat: ed ^(i*o, Qhe eating one]], glutton.
erro, to wander : ebr err-o^ Qhe wandering one39
wanderer.
geroy to carry: ger ger-o^ Qhe carrying one], car-
rier.
incuboy to lie upon : ...incub incub-o^ []the one lying upon^y
guardian of hid treasure;
nightmare.
lurcai^ to gormandise : lurc lurc-o, [the gormandising one^,
gormandiser.
prtjedovy to plunder :... piled prted-o^ Qhe plundering one],
plunderer, robber.
volo^ to be willing: ...vol vol-o*, [the willing one]], vo-
lunteer.
2. puiiffOt to pierce : pua pug-t-o, [the thing piercing],
dagger.
re6e2/o, to make war 1 BEBELL rebeU-t'O^ []the one making
again : J war again], rebel.
s. lieittor, to gormandise : hel heUu-Oy [ihe gormandising
one], gormandiser.
4. edlo, to cultivate : COL cdl-diP-uSy Qhe cultivating
one], cultivator, husband-
man.
5. tBKweot to favour: fav Jav-on-ttitf,[]the favouring one],
Favonius or the Zephyr.
6. pelio, to rout: pell PeU-on'ta^ l^the routing one],
the goddess Pellonia.
Jiuo, to Aow: flu Flu-ofi'ta, Qhe flowing one],
a name of Juno.
7. pectoy to comb : pect pect-^n^ Qhe combing thing],
comb.
Substantives of this class are also formed in imitation of those of verbal
origin. They denote the " having,*' or ** being endowed with,** that, which
. * Perhaps only found in plural number, w>&me«.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
90 LATIK BUrriXES. [Ch.111,
their primitives signify; and are formed by adding the Saffix to the
Theme.
I log of wood: cal-HB caUo^ [^one baring log of
wood ; wood-carrier], sol-
dier's servant.
cefUuria, century: centurx^iB, centuri-Oy [one baying a cen-
tury], centurion.
6ucca, cheek: hucc-tB bucc»Oy \j>ne having cheeks^,
fat-cbeeks.
caputt head : captt-U..., cdptt-o^ |[one having head^*
big-bead.
fronSf forehead : fr o n t^is, . . . froni-o^ Qone having forehead J,
big-forehead.
ctcer, chick-pea: ctcer-^i Ctcer-o, |[one having chick-
pea, t.e.], marked with a
chick-pea; Cicero.
labium, lip: I abut labvo^ [^one baying lip], big-
lip.
/on^urttM, long pole:.. /on^ Mr t-t. languri-o, [one having long
pole], long-shanks.
nasus, nose : naS'i ....... nas-o {one having nose], big-
nose, nosey.
b. lAveraa^ the god-1 Lavern-tE lavemi-Oy [one having, i,e,
dess of thieyes, La- > under the protection of, La-
yerna : J verna], thief.
Zt^t^, stage-play : lud-i lud-i-Oy [one having a stage-
play], actor.
muluSf mule I mul-i frnd-i-o, [one having mules],
muleteer.
restis, rope : res t-is rest-i-^, one having rope],
rope-maker.
o. mel, honey : m ell-is MeH-on-ta, [the one having
honey], Mellonia, the god-
dess of honey.
morbus, disease : tnorb^i Morb-on-ia, [the one haying
disease], Morbonia, the god-
dess of disease.
t^aZ/is, valley : valUis ValUon-ta, [the one having
valleys], Yallonia, the god-
dess of valleys.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IIL] substantives. — mlttnm mtei, etc 91
A. anniisv year : ann-t ^nn-on-Oy [the one having
the yearl, Annona, the god-
dess presiding over the year.
bellum^wsLTi bell-i Belt-on-a^ [the one having
war], Bellona, the goddess
of war.
orbus^ a hereaved \orb'i Orb^on-a^y [the one having
person : J (t. e. protecting) the he-
reaved], Orbona, the goddess
of bereaved parents.
pomum^ fruit : .pom-i Pdm-on-a^ [the one having
fruit], Pomona, the goddess
of fruit.
II.
Substantives in mXnus^ etc., are mostly derived from Verbs, and are em-
ployed sometimes in a passive force, and point out a person or thing *^to
which ** something '* is done ;** sometimes in a reflexive force, and show what
a person ** does to himself,'* etc.
They are formed by adding the Suffix immediately to the Root ; or by
admitting u as a Connecting Vowel between the Suffix and the Root.
Ohs. 1. Both in sound and meaning the Suffix nAmu is closely related to -fuici^, the
present participle termination of Gred^ passive and middle verbs.
1- S, V TAR, to overstep: tar [/ar-»it«tw], 1 [that which is
ter-minusy > overstepped],
J boundary.
geno, 1 gen fgren-minw*], 1 [that which is
to bring forth : J [jjrem-witniw], I brought forth
ge-minuSy | (with an-
J other)], twin.
a. feo, to give birth : pe fe-mina^ [she who herself gives
birth], female.
* In tuteld tunt OrhoncB orbati liberii parenteSf Amob. adv. Gentes, 4, cap. 7 Jin.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
. — "— ^■^^— ..
9i LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. HI.
s. alo, to nourish : al aUu-mnua^ [he that is non-
rished], nursling, etc.
v^r^i to turn: vebt Vert-u-mnus \\iQ who turns
himself], Vertumnus, the
god who, hy turning himself,
effects the changes of the
year.
to nourish : al at-u-mna, [she that is nourish-
ed], nursling, etc.
5. nFT, akin to Gr. 1 ...nept ....[Nept-u-mntuf^y 1 fhe who
vlTTT'Ofiaif to hathe : J Nept-u-nus^ J hathes^, Nep-
tune, the sea-god.
Oh», 2. Most probably here must be referred Camena, with e for I; thiju,
coMO, to sing: can [can-mlna],l [she who herself sings], muse.
ca-mena, j
03<. 8. Some words of this class, in imitation of those of yerbal origin, are derived
from substantives, and signify '< one belonging to '* that which the primitive denotes.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme.
ptcicf, \ .ptc-t Pic-u-mnHS, [the one belonging to the jmcms],
woodpecker : j Picumnns, a Roman deity, the personincation
ofthejuieics.
piium, \ ,pil'U PtZ-u-mniM, [the one belonging tothep^m],
javelin : j Pilumnus, a Roman deity, the personification
of the /n^bim.
Ctus, \ .port'U8^,.,Port''U-mnu8, [the one belonging to the por^tu],
boQr:j Portnmnus, a Roman deity, presiding over
harbours.
III.
mo, mdn-lSf m,
Suhstantives in mo, mon t«, have mostly a passive force.
They are formed by adding the SuflGbc to Boots, or to the Boots of Verbs.
Obs, 1. The proper Suffix is moHj from which, however, the final n is dropped in the
nominative singular.
8EB, akin to S. // 1 seb ser^moy [the thing sounded],
aVAB^ to sound : J speech.
Digitized by
Google
TEMy akin to tem,1 tsk [_iem''mo]f
^ of Tk\kvia^ to cut : J U-mo^
S. vf TAB, to over-l ...tab {tar-mo^
step : J ter-mo^y
Ch. IIL] SUBSTANTITBS.— mwif mla-te, ete. 93
[the thing cut],
beam ; pole.
[the thing over**
stepped], houndarj.
Obi. 2. PtdmOf pubnonis, is probably the only word in mo(ii)» tmSmi$, remaining in
tlie Latin language, which has an active force. It is fonn()ji from wijCpum, the
Ionic form of trnvfim, by transposition of a. and »» and by rejecting •• Thus, vJ^fam,
irXMfjtMf, frvXfjun ; Latin, pubno. Its meaning is ** that which breathes ;** hence, ** long.**
Obs, 3. Homo, hominit, is commonly deriyed from humMM, pointing ont, as it were,
raan's origin — *« the earthbom." Anciently it was written Acno, hemomit ; and homo,
Tiomonis.'f Hence it has been supposed that, as / is sometimes the representative of A,
HO = fo, in /b-re, while mo (mon^ is the 8uffiz,-HS0 that the word Ao-mo simply denotes,
in an intransitive force, " the beug."
IV.
1. meiif mln-iSy n, 8* men-tiiiBf mea*tif ».
2. Ynneii» Y-4nlii*-ISff n. •• X^nen^tiimy X-4iMB^tl« n.
3. tt^neuy tt^nln-lSf n, 7< tk-men^tiuiiy tt«4B«aPitif n,
%m a-4neB9 a^BiXii«-ISv »• •- A-4aeii^tiimy ^HOMm^tU n.
Substantives in men, etc., have either an active force, and denote a neuter
agent, i.e. a thing which '* does** or '^ causes'* something; or a passive
force, and denote that which "is done "or "caused;" or that "by which
something is effected ;" hence that "serves for something.*'
They are formed from Verbs by adding the Suffix to the Boot or Theme.
iVlB. The t in i-men, X-metUum; and the it in u-menf H^mentum, u-men, u-menium, are
Connecting Yowels.
1. leTo, to alleviate : leva ,,„ leva-men^ [the alleviating
thing], alleviation,
omo, to adorn: orna .... oma-m^n, [the adorning thing],
ornament.
veto, to cover : vela .... veld-men, [the covering thing],
covering.
soloTy to console : sold sola-men, [the consoling thing],
consolation,
^tto, to flow: .flu Jtu-men, [the flowing thing],
river.
* Qua reddUus termo eti, Enn. Frgm., p. 69 ed. Yahlen: hortatore bono priusquam
. ..Jmibus termo, id. ib.
t Vttlturis in Myhoia mx$erum mande&a^Aemonem, Ennius ap. Prisdan, p. 683 ed.
Putsch. : voliurui in tpinis miserum mandebat ho man em, Enn. Frgm., p. 23 ed. Yahlen.
Digitized by
Google
94 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IIL
fulcio^ to support : ,fu lei fnUn-menj [the sapporting
thing], proiL
ifioltory to endeavour : ...mo/t.....* fmoH-men, [the endeavouring
thing]^ onbrt.
fulgeOf 1 FULG [/ttj^-men], 1 [the flashing
to fash: J ftd-men^ J thing], lightning.
luceoy 1 LUC [luc'fnen]f 1 [theshining thing],
to shine: J lu-men, J light.
tegOf to cover : teg teg-tneny [the covering thing],
covering.
noscOf to know : no no-men^ [the thing serving for
knowing], name,
vteo, tobind: vi vumeUy [the thing serving for
binding], twig, osier, etc.
certOy to contend : cert a certa^meny [the thing con-
tended], contest
formidOy to dread : for ml- 1 formidd-meny [the thing dread-
da J ed], spectre.
pr<By before, first :1 .prcBfa... prcefa^meny [the thing spoken
/art, to speak : J first], prerace.
tentOy to attempt: tenta...^ tenta'tneny [the thing attempt- I
ed], attempt.
agoy to put in motion : ...AG ag-men,. [the thing put in mo- i
tion], armj on march. i
ex, out: 1 ..ea?-AG ...[ea?fl^-iii«t],l [the thing put I
ci^o, to put in motion: J exd-meny > in motion out], i
J swarm of bees. I
/ran^o, to break : frag frag-men, [the thing broken], j
fragment. I
gerOy to produce: geb ger-meriy [the thing produced],
bud ; shoot.
serOytQWWi sbr [*cr-«ien], 1 [the thing sown],
se^meuy J seed.
sternoy to Btrew : stba stra-men, [the thing strewed],
straw; litter.
volvoy to roll: volv [w/»-men], 1 [the thing rolled],
volu-meny J roll; volume.
crcuo, to sharpen : ag act^-me^t, [the thing sharpened],
point.
a. rSro> to direct : .beg re^-t-m^^z, [the directing thing],
rudder; ruler.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. III.] SUBSTANTIVES. — mwif mUi-to, «to. 95
sed^o^ to settle : bed sedi-men, [the thing settled],
sediment.
fe^o, to cover : teo ref^-f-meiiy [the eoYering thing],
cover; covering.
doe^o, to teach : doc doc-i-men, [the thing serving
for teaching], lesson; ex-
ample.
5/>ecu>, to behold : spec spec-t-metiy [the thing serving
for beholding], mark*
3. t»«o, to cover : teg re^-tf-ni«n,[theooYering thing],
covering.
cfoc^o, to teach : doc doc-u-meny [the thing serving
for teaching], lesson; ex-
^ ample.
«. leffo, to gather : leg /e;^-t(l-m^,Qhe thing gathered]],
pulse, legumes.
5. bon^Mo, to adorn: honesta, honesta-mentuniy [the adorning
thing]! ornament.
levo^ to alleviate : leva leva- mentum, [the alleviating
thing], alleviation.
iibo, to pour out: liba Ubd-fnentumf [|the thing poured
out^, libation.
ornoy to adorn : orna orna'mentufny [the adorning
thing], ornament.
«o^, to console : sola sola-mentum^ [the consoling
thing], consolation.
velor, to cover : vel&i veld^mentum], the covering
thing], cover ; covering.
con6?u>, to season : condt.,,^ condutnentum^ [the seasoning
thing], seasoning ; condiment.
fulciOy to support : »fu let fulci- mentum, [the supporting
thing], prop.
compleo, to fill up: c ample • comple-mentum, [the thing fill-
ing up], complement.
[ ar^tto, to prove : argu argu-mentum^ the thing
proving], proof.
FOV [JaV'mentum^,'\ [the warming
Jo^mentum, V thing], warm
J application.
fovea, 1 .
to warm : J
Digitized by
Google
96 LATIN SUFFIXES. ECh#1J
^e^o, to cover : teo teg-mentum^ [the coTering
thing], cover; covering.
insiruOf to baild ;1 instru.., instru-mentufn^ [the thing
constract: J serving for constructing],
implement; instrument.
torgueOf 1 tobqu ...[^torqu-mentumji \[the thing
to hurl : J tor-mentumy J serving for
hurling], military engine for
hurling stones, etc.
vieo^ to bind: vi vt-mentum^ [the thing serving
for binding], twig; osier, etc,
€. alo» to nourish : al al't-mentumy [the nourishing
thing], nourishment.
sedeoy to settle : srd sed- t-merUumy [the thing set-
tled], sediment.
tego, to cover : teg teg-umenttim^ [the covering
thing], cover; covering.
7. doeSo, to teach : doc doc'U'fnentum, [the thing
serving to teach], example.
moneo, to remind : mok. mon-^'mentum, [the thing
serving to remind], monu-
ment.
tegOf to cover : teg teg-U'tnentum, [the thing
serving to cover], cover;
covering.
8. leffOf to gather : leg leg-u-mentum, Qhe thing ga-
thered^, pulse, legumes.
0&«. 1 ilfen^um is merely a lengthening of m e n. Inl-men, l-inenl«m; and in
ii'taenf H-meniumf i and H are merely Connecting Vowels. From the Root teo, the
following are all formed : TEQ-men, TEQ-i-men, TEG-u-men, TEQ-mentum, TBO-l-menhcfii,
TEO-v-fnenlum.
Ohs. 2. Some Sabstantives in a-menf«m, formed from Adjectives or Substantivest
belong to this class. The Connecting Vowel, a, seems to point to some Verb, which has
passed from the written language, as being their Base.
titer, \ atr-i tUr-a-mentum, [the thing serving for making
black : J black], ink, etc,
capiilue, \,,,capiU'i eapUl-a-mentumt [the thing serving for giving
hair of the head : J hair to the head J, wig.
ferrumyX .ferr^x ferr'S-mentum, [the thing made of iron], iron
iron: J tool, efc.
Digitized by
Google
Cb. IIL] SUBSTANTIYKS.— ber.tato|lm««,«to. 97
V.
bar* briBv m,
The Suffix her*, added to Cardinal Adjectives^ gtres the signification of
*^ time" to the primitive. Applied in the following instances to the divisions
of the year, it gives the origin and meaning of the months of September^
October^ November^ and December, those having been originally the 7th,
Bih, 9 th, and 10th months of the Roman year.
septemy seven ',,„•*,,.. Septem-ber, [seven-time ; i.e. seventh time-
division of the year], September*
octo, eight; Octo-ber, [eight-time, i.e. eighth time-
division of the year], October*
nove^n, nine : • Ndvem-ber, [nine-time, i.e. ninth time*divi-
sion of the year], November.
decern, ten; • Decem-ber, [ten-time, i.e. tenth time-divi-
sion of the year], December.
VL
a. Y-es 1-ei,/. 4. Yum, U, m
With the Suffix ta, etc., are formed Abstract Substantives, which denote
the performing the action of the Verb, from which they are derived ; and,
hence, sometimes, in a derived force, the result, f/e., of such action. This
latter is their most common force.
They .are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root, or Verbal Theme ;
occasionally, to the Theme of the Present Participle.
;l. 1b, not ; 1 t »-£]> ined'ta, a not eating ; fasting.
edo, to eat : J
insideo, to sit in: insid .... instd-ta^, [a sitting in a place],
ambush.
exciibo, to lie out excub.... excub-tfe^ alyingout (ofdoors)»
♦ Akin to Sanscrit v&roy Persian Wr, ** time."
t /nsidiapnina^ SalL ap. Charis. p. 75 ed. Futsch*
n
Digitized by
Google
08 JLAXIH BUFFIXESL [Cb. UL
exseguor, 1 ...exsbqu..... exseqU'UBy [a following (a
to follow out : J corpse) out (of the house)],
funeral procession.
pluOf to rain : plu [p/w-ia], 1 [a raining], rain.
piuv-ta.
, vindem
demo, to take awaj : / grapes], vintage.
t^n=t7tnuin, grapes; ) ..vtn-DEM... vtn^em-ux, [a taking away of
abundOv ) jUmndans ..^,abundaHt'-U.».,jaImndant'ta, [^an aboundiDg],
to abonnd: 5 abnndanoe.
Jacto, to boast: JaetaMs. ^Jaetamt-is^ ,JaetwU'4e^ a boasting.
postunif to be able : .potent .pot en t-ie. . .- ^tent-ia, [a being able], power.
|7roff|i;ift>, to foresee: ^,..,.protiden» .prov%dent''is,...pr<mdent-ia, [a foreseeing],
foresight.
a. «)oiiff«ro« 1 ...COKGBB... ron^er-t^«, [a bringing to-
to bring together : J gether], heap, pile.
diliw, to wash awaj : ...pii»n ...... diluv-tes, [a washing away],
inundation.
effingOy to form : ........ «EF;Fia -. efftg^tes, ^ja^ forming], effigy.
tf^tf no, to hunger : esur ... tf.sttr-t«f, [a hungering], hunger.
rdho, to rave: bab rdb-ies, [a raving], rage.
scabOf to scratch: scab scdh-tes, [a scratching], rough-
ness (caused by scratching) ;
itch (causing scratching).
per, utterly ; 1 . . . p c r, 1 . . . [pernec-tes], 1 [an utter killing],
neco, takiU: J ... nec J ... perwu;-te«, J destractioiiymin.
S. eapYo» to take : cap cap-lb, a taki ng.
con, together; \ ... c<>i«, 1 ... eontag-io, a touching together ;
iango^ to touch : f ... tag J ... contact
dUuOy to wash away: ... DiLU......[|^«-ttn, 1 [a washing away],
dU&V'tOy J inundation.
exscindoy to destroy: ... Exscro... exsctd-io, a destroying.
1^0, to choose out: leg legato, [a choosing out], legion*
obsideo, to besiege: obsid ... obsid-to, a besieging.
; opinorf to think: OPin opln-to, [a thinking], opinion.
rego, to direct:.. •••.»...« beg reg-to, [a directing], direction ;
line.
«» sedlfleoy to build : •...«. j£PIFIC*.. tedifto-ium, {a building, (the
aot)], building (thing built).
Digitized by
Google
Ck. IIL] SUBSTANTnr£8.~Ia,Ii»,«to. 99
eottoqiiorf to ^onrersc : ,. coLLdQU eolldgu^ium^ {a conrerfiing^l
conversation.
confugio, to ^ee 1 ...confug... canfug-ium^ [a fleeing for ro-
for refuge: J fuge], place of refuge.
canjungo^ to uQtte: conjuo ... conjug^tum^ a uniting.
co/i, together; 1... con, II ... contag^lum^ a touching to-
ton^^9 to touch : J ...tag J geiber; contact
convivo^ to live together :coNyiy ... convity-ium^ a living together.
dUuOy to wash away; ...» pim,,.... diluv-him, [a washing awaj],
inundation.
disstdeo^ to disagree: ••• dissid .... dissid-ium, [a disagreeing], dis-
agreement.
discindo, to rend ^ ...discid ... discid'ium, a rending asunder.
asunder: j
exseindoy to rend out: ... exscid... eaudd-ium^ [a rending outj,
demolition; overthrow.
excido, to fall out: excid ... excid-ium^ a falling out*
exsuloy 1 . . .SX6UL . . . {eK9ul'4ufn\, 1 Qa being in exile J,
to be in exile : J exstl-xumy J exile.
gaudeOf to rejoice : gattb .., gaud-ium^ [a rejoicing], joy.
jefunOy to fast: ^8jiw ... jefunAumy a fasting ; fast.
nuvigoy ijo ^»SLi .......... navig ... navtg'lum^ [a sailing], sailing
vessel ; ship.
d€ft, to hate:..... <»> dd-iumy [a hating], hatred.
prasugWy to forebode :... prasag „ pnasdg^Utmy [a foreboding].
presentiment^
studeoy to 2)e busyl ... stud .... stud-iumy [a being busy about
about a thmg:: J a thing], zeal; study.
LAB, akin to S. ^ 1 ...lab lab'%um*y [jbl taking; hence,
LABH, to take : J that which takes], lip.
Obs, 1. Some Substantiyes of this class in la, let, lo, Ytim, are deriyed from Adjectiyes,
and point out 4 thing possessed tii the quality, or in the condition, denoted- by the
primitiye.
They ^ae formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of the primitive. Such are,
a. m.udax,ho\Ai a«<f2c-«» ....; Mudac-la boldness.
harbdnu, 1 harb&r'i .&<zrMr-{a...) rudeness ;8ayagene8s;bar^
rude, sayage : j J barity.
cifemens, calm clemtnt-is clementAa ...calmness; clemency.
roncort, concordant:,., concord-it conoordta ...concord.
/iJroa:, fierce : feroc-U /troc-la fierceness.
¥n«r«, unskilled;! inert-U inart-ia ... | unskilfnlness;
slothful: J j slothfnhiefla.
* See lalMnany p. S6,
h2
Digitized by
Google
100
lATIN SUFFIXES.
[Ch. lit
liwipt^ indigeat ; f nV/y-if ..^^ JM^Ya
jwi/ldtu, perfidious :... perfXd-i perfld-la p«rfidy.
gSperbuaf^TOudi «fij9er6>t .sag^erb-ia pride.
b. ftarMnu^ > .
mde ; savage ;
,poor:
..» &ar(tfr-t 6ar&^Er-ies... >radeness;8ayageiiea8{ bar-
) barity.
,^ pauper "^is ..,paiper-l«fl »,.poYer^.
eommtm-u .
.••comiiitifi'
-fo > a having in commoa ; par*
c. communis^ > ..
common: > J ticipation.
re&etfu, rebellious : rgbell-u jtbdi-lo a rebelling; rebellion.
taKs, such; ) tal-ia tal-lo > [a giving such, or like],
like: } J retaliation.
,one: ^un-hu un-lo ...onenesa; union; unity;
bgniffie-i I At^ffc-Yum... beneficence.
, malefie-i jnSlgfic-^ha^ „„hnxt, harm.
d. lenefieuSf \ „
beneficent ; i
ptdlSficus, \ .<
evil-doing : jf
Obs. 2. Substantives in turn, derived from other Substantives signifying persons,
and which denote the condition, office, or employment of sucb persons, must also be
referred to this class.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme.
1:
j
Icerdot^ >...«....,. «aeerilo£-i» .,. aacerdot-iumf
iest : j
inister, \ ....,...«. mt'nttf r-t [^ministr-%um']t
inister ; J tninist^-lum^
1 ....M..^ manffon-U
1. eoiHgOf
colleague t
fellow ;
extjd,
exile:
2. gdcerdos^
priest
ministerf
minister
nuingoy
slave- dealer
coll$g-<B co2Z%|h¥iifli... 1 [condition of a eo/7%a],
j coUeagueship.
con80rt'U tontort'ttan, I [condition of a conjort],
j fellowship.
exsiil'U [earsuZ-Yum], t [condition of an eartit/],
ex^'lum, f exile.
office of a aocenlDs],
priesthood.
>ffice of a ntmisfer],
ministry.
man^ori'lumt ) [employment of a numgo']^
a decking out and set-
ting off of slaves for sale.
vn.
1. mSnYat mSiilaei f.
Zm WBL9ntamfVk9n1U n.
Substantives in mdnta, montum^ are derived from (a) Verbs, (b) Ad-
jectives, and (c) Substantives. When derived from Verbs they denote " the
doing" that which the Verb signifies, and, hence, that of whicb the original
meaning is descriptive ; — from Adjectives, " the b«ng'* that which the Ad-
jective signifies, and, hence, that of which the original meaning is descrip-
tive; — from Substantives, something "appertaining to** them, and, hence,
that of which the original meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suflix to the Root of Verb*; but to the
Theme of Adjectives and Substantives*
Digitized by
Google
Cm III.1 SUBSTANTIVES. — mdaYfl, m«BY8B, etc lOl
Obs, 1. The Suffix tnonXa — num + tag and monlum « num + iunu See above, No. IIL
and iVb. VI.
Ofrt. 2. Substantives of this class, when formed from Snbttantiyes, have the Suffix
tnonium,
X, a. alo, to nourish : al al-t-monia, [a nourishing]^
Dourishment, sustenance.
CER, akin to S. \/1cer ^, cer-i-monia, [a making], cere-^
KAB, or KBI9 to make : J mony.
^eror, to complain :...QUEB • quer-umdnloj a complaining;.
complaint.
1». acrlSf sharp: ..« acr-is acr-t-monia, [a being sharp],
sharpness.
€Bg€r, sick (in mind): agr-i is^r-t-monla, [a being sick in
mind]^ sorrow, etc.
castusy chaste: ,^ cast-i cast-umdnia^ [a being chaste],
chastity,
parcuSy sparing u ..parent parc-i^mon^ £a being sparing],
parsimony.
sanctusy sacred : sanct-i^,. sanct-umoniay [a being sacred],
sacredness.
^m^, sad:.... trist-is ... trtst-umoniay [a being sad],
sadness.
9K« a. al«v to nourish: al al-i-moniumy [a nourishing],
nourishment, sustenance«
1>. misery wretched :•••. mttfer-t ... miser-i'moniumt [a being
wretched], wretchedness.
tristisy sad : trisi-is.... trist-umaniumy [a being sad],
sadness.
e. testtof witness: test-is .... test-i'moniumy [the thing ap-
pertaining to a witness], evi-
dence, testimony.
matety mother: matr-is ... matr-i-momumy [the thing ap-
pertaining to a mother], mar-
riage, matrimony.
/7a/er, father : ,....patr-is ... patr-i-moniumy [the thine ap-
pertaining to a father J, pa-
ternal fortune ; patrimony.
B3
Digitized by
Google
102 UliXIK SUFFIXES. LCa. W*
vm.
a- •!■• ■!■• / *• sYo, sXdiilav/. tf . tYiiiii« tU, «.
SubstantiTes ending in ti$^ etc^ are deriyed firomVerbs, and, etymologicallj,
denote "the act of doing," or "the being," that which the Verbs signify;
and hence, sometimes, in a derived force, that which is the result of their
action, or condition.
They are formed by adding the Snffix sometimes to the Root, sometimes
to the Theme.
O&t. 1. The i at the cofltmeneemont of i^ft^ is a Gomtecting Towel
&• mimliilff to remember : 4..MEN men'tis*^ [a remembering],
mind.
semino, 1 ...semin .. [semin-Hs], la seeding, or sow-
to seed s J semen-tis J ing.
reAo, to carry : tec vec-Hs^ [a carrying], pole;
lever.
}ii«to, to mow 1...HET [»i€/-^], la mowing or reap-
J miS'Hsy Jin
or reap: J mes-Hsy Jit\g.
tttBdo, to thrudt r txw [tud-tisl,
tuS'SiSf
Tus, Sanscrit root, 1 [ft»-/w],
to sound : J tus-sis,
[tL thi*tiStifig}, fl
coughing; cough.
[a sounding}, a
coughing; cough.
3. oav««» to be 1 ...CAY [cat«-^], 1 [a being caatious},
cautious: J cau-tio, J caution.
contemno^ to despise : r.iCONXEM . contem-tio^ a despising.
Jinffo, 1 .' ..Fia . . • ^ *. [fyf- ^], 1 a formings
to form : J fic-tiOy J
jungo^ 1 .♦* juNGf ....[yw«^-rio], 1 a joining.
to join: func-tw, J
tegOf ' . . . LEcJ [fc^-rfo], T a reading.
to read ;
lec'tio.
^ J
* Terra corpus est, at mentis ignis est, Epicharm. in Enn. Frgm, p.l68 ed. Yahlen:
isque totus mentis est, id. ib.
f Strengthened fonn of the Root juo.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. hi.]
SnBSXAKTiy£& — tf s. Us, ete.
103
urOy,
to burn ;
JtTB .•.[wr-<u>], 1 a burning,
accldtno^ to call to: ...acc/ama.. accldmd-Hoy a calling to; ac-
clamation.
ccsno, tosup: ccena ccend-tio [a supping], sup-
per- room.
Ze^o, to send B,n am-llega legd-tio, [the sending of an
bassador : J ambassador], embassy.
concursoy to run to^lconcursa, concursd'ttOf a running toge-
gether : J ther.
cunctor^ to delay : ....euneta .... cuncia-^tiOy a delaying.
opinor, to suppose : ...dp in a opind-tta, a supposing.
«^o, to stand : sta sta-txoj a standing, a stand-
ing still.
^racto, handle: ....... ../r a c^a ... trcmtd-tto^ a handling.
asMfib, to hear : audi audi-tio, a hearing.
prcBSdffio^ to fore-
bode:
prasdgt , prasdgi'tio, a forebodiDg.
largt largi-tio, a bestowing freely.
largior, to- bestow
freely :
sarrio^ to hoe: ...... ...#drr^l ...... sarri-Ho, a hoeing.
eo, to go : «..^i •»• l-ti(0, a going.
concurro, to mn
together :
eongeroj to heap to-
gether :
ooifCUR .....[conour-^tb], la running toge-
concurtto, J ther.
ooNaBB ..,J[€onger^t%o'\y la heaping toge-
conges^ttOy J ther.
4. conrrSdYor* to come "[ CONGRBD ,^.[congred-t{o\^ a coming toge-
[con^rc*-^fo], |-ther.
together :
egrediOTy
to go out :
mittOy
to send :
findoy
to cleave:
fodTto,
to dig:
eongreS'StOy J
}£GRED [f^^r^cZ-^toJ^l a going out.
legres-tio'], V
egres-siOy J
1 vat ...:.... [fnii'tia], 1 a sending.
J miS'Ho, J
}Fii> ..........[^-ifen,l a cleaving.
fis-sioy J
Ifod r/bfif-^to], 1 a digging.
J [/o*-^to], \
H 4
fo&^tOr J
Digitized by
Google
104 LATIN SUFFIXES, [Ctt. UL
fando^
to pour out :
Jundo^ 1 FUD ....r/tM^-HoTl a pouring out«
erodOf 1 ebod ....... [erod'tio^, ^ a gnaw ing away*
to gnaw away : J [eros-ito
91'
ol f
I J
-erO'StOi
S. p9n9f to place: jpos pos-t-tioy a placing.
iradoy to deliver up:...TRAi> trad't-tto, a delivering up*
vendOf to sell: vend venJ-t-^to, a selling.
tf. lute* to go into : INI inuttumf [a going into], a
beginning.
com, together ; I com, 1 eomi'tium, fa coming togo-
C0| togo: J I ... 1^ ther], place of assembly for
the Romans when voting in
curuB ; comitium.
Obi, 2. From meniia (No. 1), mind, mens is obtained by the following process : the t
in the SofBx, H-t^ is dropped, whence arises ment-s; the t is next dropp^, whence arises
mens. On a corresponding principle are formed the following Substantives : — wun^r,
to die; mob, m&r-tUf inor-ti, mor-s, [a dying], death: gino, to beget; oen, gen'tis,
gen-ts, gen-t, [a begetting ; hence, that which is begotten], family, etc. : mijior, to project ;
MiN, imn-^ min-U, min-$, moH'S, [a projecting ; hence, that which projects], eminence,
mountain : fundo, to pour out ; fund *tfund-Hs,fun8-tis, funS'siSyfims-Sy jun-t, fon-s,
[a pouring out ; hence, that which is poured out, or pours itself out], a fountain : font,
akin to Sanscrit pamth, to go ; pmU-iU, pon-tU, pon-tSf pon-s, [a going ; hence, that
which is made for going], a bridge.
X. tiiSt tAMf m. a. sttSf slis« m, 3. I-ttts, ItOs, «.
Substantives of this class are chiefly derived from Verbs, and denote,
etymologically, the ** act of doing," or " the being,'* that which the Verbs
signify ; and, hence, sometimes, in a derived force, denote something with
ivhich the etymological meaning is more or less connected.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root or Theme.
1. ettno, to sing: can can-tuS, a singing; song.
colo, to 1 COL [co/-^i/*], "I a cultivating.
cultivate: J cul-tus, J
* Strengthened form of the Root fud.
Digitized by
Google
€M. III.1
SUBSTANTIVES. — KU, ilU, et<*.
TiOS
C€>ntemnOy to despise : .cokteic ... con tem-tusy tk despising.
jungoy 1 JUNG* ...^Jijung-tui], 1 a joining.
to join: J junc-tuSy j
Mro, tolive: tic vic-tusy [a living], food; Vic-
tuals.
Jruor, 1 FBUa [frug-tU8']y 1 an enjoying.
to enjoy : J fruc^tusy J
ortary to rise : ob « or-tus, a rising*
orno, to provide : ornd omd-tus, a providing.
tractOy to handle: tract a «.« /rac^-^ti^, a handling*
mercovy to traffic: mere a ... mercd-tusy a trafficking.
yea (obsolete), 1 fe ft^tuSy a bringing forth.
to bring forth 1 J
y7eo, to weep : fle fli-tusy a weeping.
audiOy to hear: audi audi-tuSy a hearing.
condiOy to preserve 1 co9Mft concff-^ a preserving.
(fruits) : J
a. vidSof
to see :
congredwrf
to meet together :
concur roy
to run together :
egredwry
to go out :
ccedoy
to strike :
}
/
*> J
viD [rtrf-ZM*], ^ a seeing.
vi'SuSy
Jcsongbed ...[con^rerf-ftwl,"! a meeting to-
\congre8'tu8\y V gether.
congres'gus, J
CONCUR [concttr-<««], 1 a running.
concur^suSy J
EGRED Tegred'tusX
\egr€8'tus\t
egreS'SUSy
}CMD [c€Brf-ft^*], 1
C€BS'tUSy J
a going out.
a striking], cestus.
3. cr6po» to rattle : crep crep-t-tusy a rattling.
genoy to beget : gen . « gen • x-tusy a begetting.
J90R0, to place : pos po*-t-^ii*, [a placing], position.
^orao, to sound : ......son «on-t-fu«, [a sounding], sound.
Obs. 1. Sabstantives in a - f u «, derived from other sabstantives, denoting
persons, and which point out the office or condition of such persons, must also be
referred to this class.
* Strengthened form of Root jua.
Digitized by
Google
106
UkTIN 80FFIX£S.
[C^. IIF.
They are formed by addiag the above Saffix to th« Theme. Thia forraatioB follows
the analognr of tractatiu, mercatus, omatuSf and kindred words springing firom the Theme
of Verbs of the 1st ooajugatmi ; and poin^ to the ttqapcmed existence of such Verbs as
coiuiUo, are; pairotto, m% etc. Wofda of this kind are —
I ..^on9&l'i» ,^„»„»am»ul-d'tu9 ,„^,,.\ [the office.of a eonsul"}, con-
J j sniship, consulate.
i...patron'i pairon-d'tuM ) [the office of a patronus'],
y patronship.
\...tribun-i ....^,..Cr>6im-a-fM« >[the office of a ir^mnug'],
} } tribuneship.
) ...frl«mvlr-t frtwmvir-a-AM ......7 [the office of a triumvir'],
} } triunTirship*
in Ofia 1, both in formatioa ad cfaacaetor, are
CQfUtd,
consul :
patronuMf
patron:
tribuMtu,
tribune :
triumvir,
triumvir:
Obt, 2. Akin totba voflte
the following : —
prineep§ , ) .../irfaclp-is prnuf^p^-tu$ 1 [the condition of aprtneqts'],
• ' r8on:i J • ' - '
.s&i-a-tes .
chief place.
.1[the office of
j nate.
chief person :
old persons : j
Ofrf . 3. From princqM, osed in its proper force of an Adjective, is formed an Abstract
Substantive of a different meaning, viz. : —
princqM, \ ,„ptineXp-*i» ./> n« cl {p -i-liw > [the condition or state of one who is
first: j j /TTtac^], pre-eminence, superiority.
X.
I. tOrttftfireB^/.
ax-toratl-^turee./.
By means of tfcis class of Su&es Abstract Substantives are obtained,
which denote '^ the act of doing ** that which the primitive implies.
They are formed bj adding the Suffix to the Root, or Theme of Verbs.
Ob9. The Suffix is Iwro, etc. ; it is probably closely allied to, if not identical with,
the future participle in turU'S, with the abandonment of the future meaning.
1. AOlO. to Cul-
vv-COI*
,,ScoUtura\ *]
a cultivating.
a breaking, frac-
tare.
a joining.
a painting.
a ttizing.
tivate ;
frangoy
to break :
jungoy
to join ?
pingoy
to paint :
to mix :
...... ••»]riiAQ
cul'turCy
...Ifrag-tura'],'
/rae-iura,
...Ijung-tura'],'
junc-tura,
JUNO* ...
[ ^i<j
\ .rr.lfMa ■•••>«
* strengthened from the Root juo.
t By transposition of «c, instead of rejection of c, mix-tura is obtained.
Digitized by
Google
Om. nij SUBSrAKTITES. — tf^lYw^eto. lOl
^nercor, U> irMc : ...merea^ in#rcd-/iira, a trafficking.
Jeo (obsolete), to 1 ^ . . .P3fc fi-turc^ a bringing forth.
bring forth : J
«arrtOy to hoe : sarri #arrf-#tira, a hoeing.
tm ff^^noy to beget: ••..,. gen ffen-t-tura^ a begetting.
jMmo, to put: pod pds'Uturc^ [a pkcing], posi-
tion.
XI.
Substantives in iia^ etc., denote the "state** or "quality'* of their
primitiyes.
They are formed from Adjectives and Substantives by adding the Suffix
to the Theme*
X. puer.boy? .puer^i puer-Ha^ [[state of the puer^y
boyhood.
2. ttTftnast avaricious : ...arar-t ' avar-i-tta^ [quality of the
avarus^t avariee.
' tana$y hoary: can-t ean-i-^y [state of the canus^y
hoariness.
Justus^ jttst : • u.t^mt^i .. .•...• just-t-ttOf [quality of theytMfiM],
justice.
IcBhis, joyful : liet-i ..«»««.». kBt-v-Ha, [quality of the latus']^
joyfulneaa.
•Kes^iM, sad :.«••«»« r....«ues^-t ^ nuesi'^ita^ [quality of the
fn€pstii829 sadness.
mdtuSf bad :....«.. ........inaZ-t .•••.•• mat-i-tta, [quality of the ma-
ius^ badness ; malice.
pldnus,ev&M .t^.^.,., plan-i plan-t-tta, [state of the j?/antij;
evennessj, a plain.
piuMduSy modesit: i.....pudi&4 pudic-i-tki, [qualify of the/m-
dicus}j modesty.
' maUiSfUofti .« ^moU^ moU^i'tia^ [quality of the
mo//M], softness.
trisiigf sad: .*.*.. ^r*^.trUtri8 ....«« trist-i-tia, [jqutklitj of the iris*
tig^f sadness.
Digitized by
Google
108 tATiK SCFFlXEa* tCH. ILL
fitter, black : m^r-i nigfr-i-tia^ [quality of the
niffer]y blackness.
piger^ alothfiil : .pigr-i pigr-utiay [quality of the piger2t
slothfolness.
amictM, friend : ai»tc-t....... amte-itiay [quality of the
amicus], friendship.
puer,hoy: .puer4 ptkr-i-tiaj [state of the J9u«r],
boyhoodf
S. ttTftnast avaricious: ...arar-t avdr-t-ites, [quality of the
avarus], avarice.
canus, hoary: cdn-t •••..... can-t-/ie«, [state of the cant^],
hoariness.
planus, eyem •••. planet « p/an-t-^te;, [state of the /7/an«« ;
evenness J, a plain.
trisiis,B&dt trisUis. irist-i-ttes, [quality of the
tristis']y sadness.
piger^ slothful : 'pigr-i ....... pigr-t-iieSf [quality of the
piger'], slothfulness.
XII.
t. tfts« t&t-l«,/. «. ta, t-ee,/. 7. tudo» tftd-lnis^.
a. a$-t&i», «-t&t-is»/ 5. tus, tat-ifl,^ S. X-tudo,Y-tad-Xiil«»/.
3. X-t&s, K-t&t-is,/. tf. ¥-tas, X-tut-is«/.
Substantives in tas, etc., whether derived from Adjectives or from Sub-
stantives, denote, sometimes, the *' condition ;'* sometimes, the "state;**
sometimes, the " quality,'* of the primitive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of the primitive ;
sometimes with the Connecting Vowels e or i^ but generally without them.
Obs, 1. The Primary Saffixes are tat -a, and tut-s; in each instance s being merely
the nominative case-ending. Tas is obtained by removing the second t from tat; ta
is obtained by removing lM>th the second t and the case-ending s; while ttis ia ob-
tained by removing, as in the case of tas, the second t; and two arises by adding o
to tut, and then changing t into d. In S^tas, l-tas, \-ius, i'tudo, S and i are merely Con-
necting Vowels.
. Obs, 2. As the terminations t-a§f <u«, are the representatives of tats, tuts, the
vowels a and u are long.
1. liber, free : liber-i liber-tas^ [condition of the
liber], freedom ; liberty.
JHventsy young : .jUfie n-is, . . . juven-tas, [state of the^tf vents],
youth ; youthful age.
Digitized by
Google
Off. iir]
jpauper, poor ;
honestusy
honourable :
venustus,
graceful :
facxliSy
easy to do ;
diffxcxlis^
difficult :
egeoy
to want:
possum^
to be able :
volo,
to be willing :
SUBSTAKTIYES. — tftm tUt-ls, eto.
109
}
}
..pauper^is pauper-tas^ [state of the pau-
per\ poverty.
..hone$t4„.\^hone8t'tas],'\ [state of the ho-
hones-tas, > nestus], honour*
J ableness.
VfsnuS'Uis,
jfacul-(a$i
.,difficil-i8..,[^diffieil'tas],
difficui-t(Uy
Ifacil'tasl 1
'» J
}
„egen8i
ege
i8y \ ...[egent'tas], "j
egeS'taSf J
[state of the ve-
nuseus"], grace*
fulness,
[state of the^aci-
/»], capability.
[state of the
- difficilisl diffi.
culty.
state of the egens'],
need.
potenSf \ [pot€nt-tas\ "j [quality of the
}
poten t'is J [poten$'tas
potes'tas,
. . volensy 1 [volent'tas\
voien t'is J [volens-ta^,
[volen-iasji
voluH'tas,
potens: ability
to do], power.
[quality of the
volens'^j willing-
ness.
2. anzYiuif anxious : arust-i o^Krl-e-tof, [state of the an.Tm«],
anxiety.
ebrius, 6iunken : ebr^-i e6r«-e-to«, [state of the e^rtW],
drunkenness.
phUf pious ; .pi-i pue-tas, [q uali ty of the piusjy
piety,
vartttj, various : vart-i vari-e-tasy [condition of the
rartuf], variety.
sociusy fellow t aoci'i soct-e-tctSy [condition of the
soeius^y fellowship ; society.
s. tttrozy fierce : atroc-is atroc't'tas, [quality of the
atrox]y fierceness.
bonus, good : bdn-i bon-t-tasy [quality of the bonus"],
goodness.
erudelis, cruel; • cmdel-is •.,, erudel-utasy [quality of the
crudelis\ cruelty.
Digitized by
Google
110 X.ATIN BTTFVIXEB. [Ch. IIL
facUis^ eaisj i - ,facU'is faeH'^utajs^ [quality of the
faciUs]^ easiness.
• /«ni5, gentle : Un-is leno^^eu^ [quality of tlie Zntt;],
gentleness.
5«av», sweet: •••. sww~is suav't-tas, [quality of the
ncavw], sweetness.
civis, citizen : civ-is civ -i- tas, [condition of the ctvis]j
citizenship.
vfV^o, virgin : virgin- is .... virgin-i-tas, [condition of the
rtr^o], virginity.
4. jttvSnlig young : JUven-is ..« . . juven-ta^ [state of the juvenis']^
youth.
senex^ 1 ^, *sentc'is .... [^senicta]^ 1 [state of the sen ex],
old : J senec-tOy J old age.
t^t^eo;, avenger : vindic'-is .,.. vindie-ta, [quality of the vin^
rfear], vengeance.
S. jttvSnlSv young ; .jUvMn-is .... juven-tus, [state of ihejuvenis'],
youth.
senex, 1 . . . ; ^sentc-is .... {sentc-tus'], 1 [state of the senex"],
. old : J senec-tus, J old age.
vir,msini .....*.rlr-t vir-tus, [quality of the vir],
nianliness; courage, etc.
6. servoji, slave : serv-i serv-i-tus^ [condition of the
servus~\y slavery.
y, oonBuetafly \ eonsuet-'i .... [cons«et''iudo']y 1 [quality of the
accustomed: J consue-tudo, f consMetus\
J custom.
honestuSy \ honest-i [honesUtudo'\^'^ [quality of the
honourable : J hones-tudoy I honesHts],
I honourabie-
. J : ness.
* The old genitive seiAaSf is found in a fragmeot .of Plautus» quoted by Priaeign :
Senex, senU, ^amvis Plauius,genitivum ejus, 8 e n i ci s, protuUt in Cistellaria; "cUUores,
leUisiimi vos rtegocioU stnicig soletis esae^" Frisciany 6, p. 724 ed. Fatsdi.
Digitized by
Google
Cb. inO SUBSTAlTTiyES. «^ •r«ar-lst etc 111
inquUtus, unquiet: ... inquiet-i ....[inquiei^udo]y^ [quality of the
inquie-tudo, > %nquieius\ in«
J quietude.
nuinsueiuSy mild: nutnsuet^i ,.,[mansuet-iudo],^ [qualitjofthe
J mildness.
soUicUu*^ anxious i ... sollicU-i ^„.\_sollieit'tudo'],'l [quality of the
soUicUiudo, I ^oHicUns'],
I anxiety; foU*
J citude.
8. Bltnm, high : ah-i . .^ . .« . . . aU-x-iudo^ [coDdidon of Hie
altus^ height.
/eni«, gentle : len-is Un-x-iudo, [quality of the
lenis]^ gentleness.
latus^hvoBAi Idt-i latt-tudoy '[quality of the
latus"]^ breadth; (latitude).
langusy long :••«•«. long-i imtg-x-iudoy [quality of the
hngus^y length; (U)ngitude).
magnuMy great : magn-i magn-x- tudo^ [quality of the
magnus], greatness; magni-
tude.
99inf^ti«, much ; 1 ,..,.. mult-i, '^ tnult'4''tudOf [quality of the
mulHf many J multo-rum ^ multus"], large number ; mul-
) titude. .
sxntxlis, like I sxtntl-is sxmxl'i-tudo, [quality of the
fimilis]^ likeness ; similitude.
0^9, Words are occasionally formed from Proper Names to denote the ** condition " or
** quality '* of a person ; as Appietat, Lenttditas, in Cicero, Fam. 8, 7, 5.
AfpUu, Apyiua : ,^.j. Appi-L AppH-g-taSf [the quality of an Appios],
Appiety, or the nobility of an Appms.
Xen^t/Zitf, Lentuliu : LentHl-i. Leutul-i-taa, Ithe quality of a Lentulus];
Lentulity, or the nobility of a Lentulus.
XIII.
1. or* 5r-l«f m. 4. a8» 9r»iSp ». tf • iir» tir-l«f n,
3. 1W9 4r-lSff •.
Substantives In or, oris, m., are mostly formed from Boots or Verbs, and
usually denote an abstract quality, akin to the meaning of their &oot or
Verb. Occasionally, however, they point out a concrete thing, of which
Digitized by
Google
112 l^ATIK SUFFIXES, [Ch. IIL
their etjnnolc^cal meaning is descripUve. Borne few are obtained from
Adjectives.
Substantives in Sr^ oria^ n^ etc., belong to the same class as those in
or, dm. m., but are mostlj found to denote concrete things, of which the
etymological meaning is descriptive. These, also, are mostly formed from
Boots or Verbs.
All Substantives of this class, derived from Roots or Verbs, have, etymo-
logically, a participial force. Such as are obtained from intransitive Roots
or Verbs have a neuter meaning ; but such as are obtained from transitive
Roots or Verbs have sometimes an active, sometimes a passive, meaning.
Those, however, which spring from Substantives denote the " having *' or
^ being** that, which the primitive signifies.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to Roots, whether Frimary or
Secondary ; but to the Theme of Substantives.
1. ttmof to loTB : »....AH am-OTy [a loving^ love.
yai'co, to favour ; ♦...fav /ar-or, [a favouring], favour.
Hmeoy to fear : tim ^«iH>r, [a fearing], fear,
cldmOy to cry out: clam ... cldm-ory [a crying out], clam-
our.
fiiro, to rage : fub fur^OTy [a raging], rage.
albeoy to be white; .alb alb-^r, [a being white], white-
ness.
palleOy to be pale ; pah, pall-or, [a being pale] , pale-
I
riibeOy to be red: bub rub-or, [a being red], redness.
«/>/tfnrfco, to be bright : ...SPLEND... splend-ory [a being bright],
brightness.
LAB, akin to S. \/l ...lab Idb-or, [a taking or getting;
LABH; Greek AAB, |^ hence] toil; labour.
a/ of Xafifiayoh, to
take;
CRU akin to S.l ...CBU cru'OVy [the running thing],
^ CRi, whence I- blood running from a wound,
currOy to run ; J etc.
lentusy clammy : , lent-i lent-ory [a being clammy],
clamminess ; stiekinesSii
a. aequiui* 1 evel :...•• •..aq H-i..* • , agu-OTy [a being leyel], level
or even surface* . . .
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IlL]
SUBSTANTIVES. — er, 5r»ls, etc.
113
9. VXCK akin to S. a/
PAC, to bind ; and Gr.
HAF, V of irriyyvfjLif
to fasten :
KEM. akin to Gr. NEM, "
V of vifjLWf to feed :
.PIG .pig-n-usj [a binding or
fastening], pledge ; assu-
rance.
.NEM nem-us [the feeding thing],
pasture land (among
forests, etc.)
•TEN ten-US, [the extended
thing], springe ; snare.
TEN, akin to S. a/ tan, "
and Gr. rctVw, to ex-
tend :
PEC, akin to S. >/ PAC, '
to bind, fasten-up :
CORP, akin to S. a/
KRLiP, to be made :
FRIO, akin to Gr.'
•Pir, a/ of piy-ooi, to
be cold :
TEM, akin to TEM, Vl tem tem-p-uSy [the cut thing;
of TSfjLVijy to cut : J hence] portion of time ;
time.
fe, to bring forth fe ./«-n-M5*, [the brought-
forth thing], interest of
monej lent.
.PEC pec'USy [the fastened-up
thing], cattle.
.CORP corp-us, [the made thing],
body.
.FRIG ......../r^-M«, [a being cold], cold;
coldness.
4. lidOf
trust
n
trusting],
treaty.
.....FID fid'us^, 1 [a
L/oiJ-M*], y in
fad'USy J
FU, akin to S. v^l fu .yt2-n-tf« [an offering in sa-
HU, Greek 6w-«, to V crifice ; hence, slaying],
offer in sacrifice : J death.
pendOf 1.... ....PEND [pe« J-t«], 1 [a weighing],
to weigh : J pand-us, J weight.
olescoy to grow : • • oi.. ol-us, [the growing thing],
garden herbs.
5. eOf to go :
.t-^er J, a going, also, road.
• Compare in Greek rSKot, interest, from ««, root of tuct«, to bring forth.
t Fcedus, mtod fidus Ennius scribU dictuffif Yarro de Linguft Xatina, 5, § 86 ed.
MiUler.
X The Genitive itiris occurs in a Fragment of Nasvins preserved in Priscian : ignoti
iter is mmus, Priscian, 6, p. 695 ed. Putsch. The Ablative Here is found in Lucretius,
5, 653 : concusMOS itere,et labefactos aSre mtdto. The usual oblique cases, itineris, etc.,
belong to an obsolete form itiner, which is obtained hy prefixing in to the Suffix er.
I
Digitized by
Google
114 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. HI.
6. ftilffeof to flash : fulq .fuXg-ur^ [the flashing
thing], lightning.
7. catVf akin to S. ^cri,
to go:
ju, akin to S. v/ JU,
to join or bind:
,.CRU [cr«-tw], 1 [the going
cf'USy J thing], leg.
.JU [;«-««], ^ [a
PU, akin to S. \/ puj,"! PU [pw-«*],1 [the stinking
to stink; Gr. xv-of, \ p-us, > thing], corrupt
corrupt matter : J J matter ; pus.
THU, akin to S. \/ hu, 1 thu [^Am-m*], 1 [the thing
Gr. Bv-Wy to offer in > th-us, I offered in sa-
sacrifice: ^ J » I edifice], in-
J cense.
Obs, The n in pig-n-us, and /e-n-us ; the t in t-^-er ; and the p in tem-p-us, are euphonic.
XIV.
1. do* dXn-lSv/* 3. i-do, I-dYii-ls,/.
a. e-do, e-dXn-is,/. «. O-do, &-d¥n-ls,/. '
Substantives in do^ etc., are formed from Verbs, Adjectives, and Sub-
stantives. When derived from Intransitive Verbs, or Adjectives, they
etymologically denote "the being" that, which their primitive implies; and.
hence, is obtained the name of something of which the etymological meaning
is descriptive. When derived from Transitive Verbs, they etymologically
denote '*the doing '* that, which their primitive implies; and hence, again,
is obtained the name of something of which the etymological meaning is
descriptive. When derived from Substantives they denote ** the having "
that, which their primitive implies ; and in this case also is obts^ned the
name of something of which the etymological meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root or Theme of Verhs ;
but to the Theme of Adjectives and Substantives.
Obs. 1. Words of this class are mostly Abstract Substantives. Some few, when used in
a derived meaning, have a concrete force.
Obs. 2. In e-do, i-doy u-dOf the c, i, u are Connecting Vowels.
Obs, 3. Probably />rwiwfo, "dread," is obtained by elision from formtd-i-do.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. 111.] SUBSTANTIVES. — do, dta-lfl, etc ; fo, fln-is, etc. 115
X. alMo, to be white : albe alhe-do, [a being white], white-
ness.
liveo, to be livid: live live-do, lividness.
ntgreoy to be black : nigre .... nigre-do, [a being blaek],
blackness.
riibeoj to be red : rub rube-do, [a being red], redness.
pUtreOy to be rotten : .put re ... putre-do, [a being rotten], rot-
tenness.
2. ffrjlTis, heavy : grav-is ... grav-e-doy [a being heavy],
heaviness.
pinguis, fat: ping u- is . pingu-e-do, [a being fat], fat-
ness.
uro, to nipl UR ur-e-do, [a nipping with cold]»
with cold : J blighting, blasting (of
plants).
inter, between, 1 inter \ .. intercap-e-do, [a taking be-
capto, to take : J cap J.. tween], interruption, e#c.
copto, to take : cap cap-e-do, [a taking; hence,
concr,\ a thing for taking; a
bowl (used at sacrifices).
3. cuplo, to desire: cup cup-i'do, [a desiring], desire.
libeo, to be pleasing : lib lib-i-do, [a pleasing (one's self)],
pleasure, inclination, etc.
4. testa* shell : test-cB.... test-u-do, [a having a shell;
hence, concrT], one having a
shell; tortoise.
hira, empty gut : hi r-m .... htr- u^do, [[a having an empty
gut; hence, concr.'], one
having an empty gut; leach.
XV.
1. ffo, ff¥n-is,/. «. u-ffo, 11-ffXii-ia,/. 6. l-l-A-ffo, Y-l-ft-fffo-is,/.
2. ft-gro, ft-ffln-is,/. 5. 1-i-ffO, 1-I-f In-Ys,/. 7. Y-l-I-f o, X-1-i-ffKn-is, /.
3. i-ffOp I-ffXn-is,/.
Substantives of this class, all ending in ^o in the nominative singular,
present some difficulty as to the origin of the Suffix, and, hence, also, as
I 2
Digitized by
Google
116
LATIN SUFFIXES.
[Ch. in.
to their strict etymological meaning. It must be borne in mind tHat the true
Suffix is gin, as appears in the genitive case ; go being obtained by dropping
the final consonant and by changing t into o. Perhaps the nearest approach
that can be made to its origin, is attributing to ^tn an affinity to the Greek
Root TEN, and the Latin Root gen, which is effected by merely substituting
i for e. Hence, if the Suffix gin is considered as the representative of
yev-oc or ghi'USj the force of ** a kind of*' attaches to it ; and this it will
be seen, in the following examples, is often the case. If, however, it be
considered as representing the Latin verb gen-o^ or the Greek verb yiyvofiai
(which exhibits yiv in 2nd aorist e-yci^-ofii^v), we may assign it either a
transitive force, viz., " that which produces'* something : or a passive force,
viz., that " by which something is produced ;" or " from which something
springs ;" or, even, something which simply '* exists," or " is." These mean-
ings also, it will be seen in the under-given examples, no less belong to it.
Substantives of this dass are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of
Verbs, or the Theme of Substantives or Adjectives.
Ob$. Many words of this class are found, especially several denoting the names of
plants, which it is, perhaps, almost impossible to trace. All that can well be affirmed of
them is, that they appear to be remotely connected with some effect produced bj- them,
or by some natural quality they possess. Such are : — Sd-ago, a plant resemblmg the
savin tree; tust-l-l-a-go*, the herb "colts-foot," a preparation of which is used for
coughs; lact'\-l-d-go, a plant called also chamnBdaphney or dwarf-laurel, perhaps from
some milk-like juice belonging te it ; with several others.
1. Tlreot to bloom : vnt
vir-ffOj [the blooming one],
maiden, virgin.
,.8imiU(B ... simil-a-gOy 'kindi oi Hmila,
2. Iter, corn : .farr-is farr-d-go, [several kinds of
far}, mixed food for cattle.
ferul-a^ giant-fennel ,.,ferul'€e.,.. feruX-a-go, species q{ ferula.
lappa, bur : lapp-cR lapp-d-go, kind of lappa.
milvusy the fishl ...mt'/t^-t milv-d-go, kind of milvus,
gurnard :
stmtlay fine wheat '
flour:
vtV, man vir^i i?i>-a-^o, [one in whom manli-
ness exists], a female of
spirit and courage.
lumbuSf loin : ••••••» .Jumb-i •••• lumb-a^o, [that which springs
from the loins], pain in the
loins ; lumbago.
* The Greek word for this plant is fivx^'-
Digitized by
Google
Ch. III.] SUBSTANTIVES. — ffo, rYn-ii, etc. 117
cortum, skin : cori-i cori-a-go^ [that which springs
from the skin], cutaneous
disease in animals.
carrus, waggon : carr-i carr-d-go, [that which is pro-
duced by waggons], a species
of outwork or defence made
by placing waggons close
together.
IM, ^ of tmttor, 1 ••• IM ini-d-goy [that which springs
to imitate : J from imitating], image ;
picture.
Jbro, to pierce : fob for-d-go, [that bj which pierc-
ing is produced], dividing
thread in a web.
t^oro, to swallow 1... vob vor-d-go, that by which swal-
down: J lowing down is produced],
gulph ; abyss.
3. pendSov to hang : pekd /lemf-t-^o, [that which produces
hanging down], name of an
internal disease.
rubeo, to be red :..... ...bub rub-vgOy [that which pro-
duces the being red], rust.
stribl, akin to "X stribL.,,,. sinbhi-go^ [kind of twisting
orpipiKoi, twisted : J or perverting of words],
solecism ; wrong expression.
verto, to turn : vbbt vert-l-goy [that which pro-
duces turning], a turning
round ; vertigo.
prurioy to itch : pbub prur-l-goy [that by which
itching is produced]^ the itch.
celo, to conceal: CBL [cel'%-go'\y^ [that by which con-
cal'i-goy > cealing is pro-
J duced], mist.
ortor, to spring up : ...OB or-i-gOy [that by which spring-
ing up is produced], origin.
uroy toburn: ub ur-i-goy [that by which burn-
ing (passion) is produced],
lust.
me/, honey : mell'is .... mell-i-go, [that by which
honey is produced], flower-
juice, from which bees make
honey.
13
Digitized by
Google
118 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. III.
mentum^ chin: ment'i •.. fn^nM-^o, [that which springs
from the chin], an eruption
in lambs^ commencing gene-
rallj at the chin.
clauduSy lame: .. elaud-i ••• claud-i^Oy [that bj which the
being lame is produced],
lameness.
surdus, deaf:. surd-i .... surd-i-go, [that by which the
being deaf is produced],
deafness.
ft. lana, wool : lan^m ...... lan'U-go, [kind of wool], soft
or downy hair.
aspevy sharp: asper-i ... asper-u-goy [a kind of what
is sharp], name of a prickly
plant.
0^2^, white: alb-i alb-u-go^ [producing what is
white], film ; albugo.
ferrum^ iron I ^ferri ferr-u-gOy [springing from
iron], rust of iron.
€e«, copper : ar-is tjer-u-goy [springing from cop-
per], rust of copper.
saUuSy salt: sals-i sals-u-go, [springing from that
which is salt], saltness.
vesper, evening : vesper^i, * vesper-u-gOy [springing from
the evening], evening star.
5. ▼Mum, blemish : viti-i vtii-higOy [kind of blemish], a
cutaneous disease.
FU, akin to S. Vl FU yS-M^o, [that produced by the
DHiJ, to rush : J rushing (of smoke)], soot.
6. salsiw, salt : sals'i sah-i-UdgOy [springing from
that which is salt], sdtness.
7. uveo, to be moist : ,..uv uv-t-l-igoy [thdX which is pro-
duced by being moist],
moisture.
Digitized by
Google
Cb. IV.] VERBS.- o, are, etc. 119
XVI.
l3^ttliM, mlUlf m.
Substantives of this class have, etymologically, a participial meaning, and
denote something, of which the etymological meaning is descriptive.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Boot of Verbs.
[^the doing one],
servant.
Qhe pricking
thing], goad,
etc.
fiu»io»todo: FAC [^fac'mulus2%
fa-mulus,
STiG, akin to STir, 1 stig [stig-mulm],
V of <rrtf w, to prick : J sH-mulus,
cu, akin to S. V\ •••cu cw-iwm/m*, [the collected thing],
TSHi, to collect : J heap, pile, etc.
CHAPTER IV.
SUFFIXES OF VERBS.
!•
1. Off -are. 3, a. o* -Sre. ' 3, e. tto* -ii^re.
2. £oa-ere« b. YOy-Sre. ft. lo* -Ire
By means of the Conjugational Suffixes, as above given, added to Roots,
or to the Themes of Substantives and Adjectives, are obtained Transitive and
Intransitive Verbs.
Obs. 1. Verbs formed from Roots maybe termed Pure Verbs: those from Sub-
stantives and Adjectives are termed Denominative.
Obs. 2. Deponent Verbs come also under this formation.
A. TRANSITIVE VERBS.
A. PuBB Vebbs.
Pure Verbs Transitive denote " the doing " of that which is implied in
their Roots.
1. AJbB, white: alb-o, to whiten.
AM, love:.. am-o, to love.
I 4
Digitized by
Google
120 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IV.
NEC, kill: neC'O^ to kill.
YOO^ call: voC'O^ to call.
a. BASf have: hah-eoy to have.
MOV, move: ; iitov-«b, to move.
TOND, shave: toncf-eo, to shave.
viD, see: ..« vid-eo, to see.
St a. BZB, drink : 6t6-o, to drink.
Die, point out (by speech): dic-Oy [to point out (by
speech)], to say.
DUG, lead: rfttc-o, to lead.
SCRIB, write: sctib-Oy to vrrite.
b. CAP* take: eop-io, to take.
RAP) snatch: rop-lb, to snatch.
o. AC, point : ac-uOy to point or sharpen.
TBiB, distribute: ^ri6-«o, to distribute.
ft. AUB, hear: au^-tb, to hear.
HAUR, draw: Aawr-tb, to draw.
viNC, bind: vtnc-to, to bind.
B. Denominative Vbebs feom Substantives.
Denominative Verbs Transitive, formed from Substantives, signify ^ the
doing ** or ** acting the part of** that which is denoted by their primitives.
1. nomen, name : nom in-is, . . nomtn-Oy to name.
semeriy seed: semin-is,... semtn-Oy to seed.
vulnuSy wound: vulner-is,,, vulner-Oy to wound.
exy out; I exy \ exstirp-Oy to root out; to ex-
sHrpSy root: j stirp-is J tirpate.
ventultiSy a little wind : ventul-i ... ventul-Oj to wind or fan a little;
to ventilate.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IV.] VERBS. — o,ftre,ete. 121
Deponent,
comes f companion : ...comit-is,., comit^or, to be a companion to;
to accompany.
Jury thief: ..fur-is fur-or, to steal.
interpreSy 1 inter- "I ...twferprc/-or, to interpret.
interpreter : J pret-isj
jaciUumy dart : ,jacul-i jacul-ory to dart.
osculumykiBa: osciil-i oseuUory to kiss.
ntUriXy nurse: nutric-is.,. nutric-ory to nurse or rear.
ft. oostos, guard: custod-is.., custod-tOy to guard.
Jinisy end : .fin-is fin-io, to end or finish.
pcenOy punishment : ,,,p(Bn-<B poen-to, 1 to punish.
pun-ioy J
vestisy clothing : ves t-is vest-Wy to clothe.
C. Denominatits Vbbbs from Adjbctiybs.
Denominatiye Verbs Transitive, formed from Adjectives, signify "to
make" or "cause" a person or thing to be" of that nature," or "possess
that quality " which is denoted by their primitives.
aptiw, fit: apt'i apt-Oy to ^t
disy rich: dit-is dlt-o, to enrich.
hehesy blunt: hebet-is,.., hebet-Oy to blunt.
libery free : liber-i llber-Oy to free,
nigery black : nig r-L nigr-o, to make black.
tutusy safe: ,,„Jut-i tut-o, [to make safej, to de*
fend.
Deponent,
misert wretched : miser-i, miser-or, [to make one's self
wretched about], to lament.
mutuusy borrowed: ,,,mutii-i mutu-ory [to make borrowed],
to borrow.
^^ safe: tut^i tut-ory [to make safe], to de-
fend.
molite, soft: moll-is moll-to, to soften.
stabilisy firm ; s tab %l-is . . • stabtl-tOy to make firm.
Digitized by
Google
122 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IV.
B. INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
A. FusB Vebbs.
Pure Verbs Intransitive denote the " being engaged in," or " the being,"
that which is implied in their Roots.
1. CBBP, creak: ••• crep-o, to creak.
SON, sound: sou-o^ to sound.
TON, thunder: ton-o, to thunder.
2. A&Bf white: a^-eo, to be white.
LUC, light: luc-eOy to be light; to shine.
3. HlTB, cover : nub-Oj to cover (with a veil).
REP, creep: rep-o, to creep.
STREP, resound : ^ strep-o to resound.
ft. &vo% roar: rug-iOy to roar.
SAL, leap: «aZ-to, to leap.
VEN, come: - ven-ioy to come.
B. DENOMntATiYE Vebbs fbom Stjbstaxtives.
There are some few Denominative Verbs Intransitive of 1st, 2nd, and
4th conjugations belonging to this class.
They denote the " being engaged" or " employed in doing," or " the being "
that, which is denoted by their primitives.
There are also several Denominative Verbs Intransitive of the 1st conju-
gation, Deponent Form.
They denote " the being " that, or " the behaving like " that, or " the
occupying one's self with " that, which is denoted by their primitives.
1. ffermen, bud: germtn-is ..• germm-Oy to bud.
labor y labour : labor-is labor' o, to labour.
mUeSy soldi er : miltt-is miUt-Oy to be a soldier.
* Akin to Sanscrit bu, tonum edere ; the g is inserted to strengthen the root.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
Ch. IV.] VERBS. — o,*re,eto. 123
2. iios, flower : .flor-is .,,,,. fior-eOy to flower.
frons, leaf : .frond-is frond-tOy to be in leaf.
ft. sermsa slave : serv-i serv-to, to be a slave.
Deponent,
8Dmttii», rival : tsmu-li (Btnul-or, to be a rival.
ancilla, maid-servant: ancilUce ... ancUl-or, to be a maid-servant
aiiceps, fowler : auctp-is ... aucip-or, to be a fowler.
domtnus, lord: domtn-i domm-or, to be a lord.
ph%ldsdphus,philoBO'\phildsdph-i, philosdph-or, to be a philoso-
pher: J pher.
auffur, augur: augur-is .•. augUr-or, to perform the office
of an augur.
comix, a crow; comicM .«• comtc^or, to do as a crow; to
crow,
BacchuSy Bacchus: ,.,Bacch-i ... bacch-ory to act like Bacchus;
to be a bacchanal.
(rr<»ctt«, a Greek : „.Gr€ec-i grcec-or, to act or live like a
Greek.
aqua, water : aqu-a aqu^r, to fetch water.
jocus, joke : Jdc-i jdc-or, to joke.
negoHum, business: ...negotui negott-or, to carry on business.
piscisy&sh: ,pisc-is pi^c-or, to flsh.
C. Denominative Yebbs fbom Adjectives.
Some Denominative Verbs Intransitive of the Ist, 2nd, and 4th con-
jugations, both Active and Deponent forms, are derived from Adjectives.
They denote " the being of that nature" or " quality " which is expressed
by their respective primitives.
1. conoon, agreeing : ,,, concord-is concord-o, to agree.
jejunuSy fasting: jejun'i ... jejun-Oy to fast.
pigery dilatory : .pigr-i pigr-o, to be dilatory.
2. calTiis, bald : calv-i calv-eOy to be bald.
cdnusy grey : cdn-i can^eo, to be grey. •
flavuSy yellow : fldv-i fldv-eoy to be yellow.
Digitized by
Google
124 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IV.
hebeSy blunt: heb-is* ... heb-eo^ to be blunt.
miser, wretched: mtser-i ••• miser-eo, (to be wretched for
another,) to pity.
niger, black : nigr-i • nigr-eOy to be black.
3. fSroz, fierce : .feroC'is ... /erdc-io, to be fierce.
superbus, proud : superb-i,,. superb-xoy to be proud.
Deponent
. noisy : .......Mrgut-i ... argut-or, to be noisy.
kptus, joyful : lat-i kB-tor, to rejoice.
morigertu, complying: mo riger-i. mortger-ovy to comply with.
pigeTy dilatory : pigr-i pigr-OTy to be dilatory.
rusticus, belonging Irtt^^te-t ... rtts^tc-or, to belong to, or live
to the country :... J in, the country.
tristiSy sad : trist-is trist-oTy to be sad.
mYs«r» wretched: miser-i ... mtser-eory to be wretched (for
another), to pity.
blanduSf flattering : ...bland-i ... ^ncl-tor, to flatter.
11.
1. to» t&re> 2. so, s&re. 3. Y«to» Y-t&re.
Verbs of this class are called Frequentative and Intensive Verbs. Ety-
mologically they denote the ^ doing a thing frequently ;** and hence, in a
derived meaning, they have an Intensive force, the notion of " energy,"
*• increase," or "violence** being connected with the constant repetition of
an action.
They are formed by adding the Suffix, for the most part, to the Root of
Primitives of the 1st and 2nd conjugations, and to some also of those of the
3rd conjugation ; but occasionally they are formed from Hoots.
N.3, For Deponent Verbs of this class, see Obs, 2.
* The common genitive is hgbSth; Mbis if the old genitive. The old accusative
hebem is found in Dnnios, p. 63 ed. Vahlen.
Digitized by
Google
Ch« IV.] VERBS.— to, tare, etc. 125
X. aeelplo, to take : accip [accip-^o], 1 to take readily.
accep'to, J
cano, to sing : •••..can can-to, to aing with energy.
trahoy to drag: trac trae^to, to drag violently,
2. onrrOf to run : CURR rcttrr-to],! to run hither and
[cwr-to], • thither.
cur-sOy
f^^encfo, to ward off:. ..•••DEPEND... [^c?^nc?-toj,1 to ward off dili-
gently.
dicOy to say: ....Die die-to, to say often.
gerOy to carry : ger [^er-to], "I to carry often or
geS'tOy J much.
/>eWo, to drive PUL />w/-to, I to drive much; to
and pul'SOy j beat ; batter, etc.
quattOy to shake: quat [^uaZ-to], 1 to shake violently.
quaS'SOy J
3. olftmov to cry out : clam • clam-i-tOy to cry out violently.
imperOy to command : ....ihper.... imper-t'tOy to command power-
fully.
rdgoy to ask : rog rdg-l-to, to ask much or eagerly.
vdloy to fly : vol vol-t-tOy toflyhitherand thither.
domo, to tame : dom ...... dom-t-tOy to tame thoroughly.
adjiiv'Oy to help : ad juv .... [^adjuv-t-to'}, 1 to help repeatedly.
CtdjU'tOy J
cfte^o* (obsol.), to doubt :.DUB dub-i-tOy to doubt much, to
hesitate.
FLAG, akin to Gr.*] ...flag Jlag-i-to, [to bum with desire ;
*AEr, >/of ^Xcyw, f hence], to demand strongly,
to burn : J
lateoy to lie hid : lat lat-^tOy to lie hid thoroughly.
paveOy to fear: pav pav-t-tOy to fear greatly.
agOy to put in motion: ...AG ag-X-tOy to put violently in mo-
tion.
* <« DMbaty dvbUaiy" Festus, p. 67 ed. Mttller.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
126 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IV.
cogo^ to gather together I cog co^-t-to,"] to gather frequently
in the mind: j i- together in the mind;
J to ponder over.
nosco, to know : NOSC nasc-i-to, to know well.
qutsrOf to seek: qujeb q^itBr-t'to, to seek earnestly.
viso^ to visit : yis vlsJi'to, to visit often.
„ to look at : „ ,, to look at attentively.
OAf. 1. /rrito is probably to be regarded as a Frequentative Yerb of the 4th conjuga-
tion, from irriOj ** to snarl " (as a dog) ; for the proper meaning of the verb is certidnly
Intransitive. The long t is an anomaly, and seems to result from the 4th conjugation
usually taking a long vowel in its derivatives. We might, perhaps, even assign its
formation to the Verbal Theme, instead of the Boot, in which case the t would, according
to the rules of construction, be long before the Suffix beginning with a consonant. The
two modes of construction thus suggested are as follows : —
a. trrto, to snarl (of dogs) : ibb trr-t-to, [to snarl often ; hence, of persons],
to be exasperated.
b. ■ n irri trH>fo, „ „
Probably this is the only instance of a Frequentative Verb springing from a primitive
of the 4th conjugation, in what may be called the 1st formation. For an instance of the
2nd formation, see venttto in Obs. 6.
Obs, 2. There are some few Frequentative Verbs of the Deponent form. Such are,
to embrace
amplector, \ amplect
j ^ampleet'tor'\,'\
J^-rJ'h to «"»'««=« eageriy.
ampleX'OT, J
minor, to menace: min mtn-f-tor, to menace strongly.
smoor, to seek to know : seise sctsc-i-tor, to seek much to know; to
inquire diligently.
Obs. 3. All Frequentative Verbs, whether of the Active or Deponent form, are of the
1st conjugation.
Obs. 4. In the formation of derivatives from Verbs of the 3rd conjugation, where to
is suffixed immediately to the Boot, the same euphonic changes take place, as in forming
the Supine of the primitive.
Obs. 5. Some Frequentatives, formed by adding to immediately to the Boot of their
primitives, admit the formation of a Frequentative from themselves. This is done by
suffixing l-t o to their own Boot.
accepto, to take readily: accept... accept-Uo, to take very readily.
canto, to sing with energy: cant cantAto, to sing with great energy.
c«r«o, to run hither and thither : ...cubs curs-ito, to keep running hither and
thither.
defenso, to ward off diligently : defens... defens-lto, toward off very diligently.
dicto, to say often: dict dict-lto, to say very often.
gesto, to carry often, or much:.. gest ^fcsMto, to carry very often, or very much.
N.B. Frequentatives in ¥fo do not admit of the second Frequentative formation.
Obs. 6, Some few Frequentative Verbs of what may be termed the second formation
are found, though the first formation from the Boot of a Verb is not known to be in exis-
tence. Such are the following : —
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IV.]
VERBS. -- «co« BcSre, etc.
127
to stick:
,.HAR [har-fy)'],
lUBS- '
lego, -J
to read, >
to gather: J
acribo, 1 ...
to write :j
ime:/
has-
HMS-O
8-0]J
has'ito, to stick fast
■Z^'to"!' I'e^-Wotto read often; to
«w-wj, > gather eagerly.
SCRIPT-O], J
tcr^'ito, to write often.
r,!^5-'T \ vent-ito, to come often.
to come
JV,B. The formation of A<e«o from Juereo, a verb of the 2nd, and of vento from venio, of
the 4th conjugation, should be marked.
Obs. 7. Some few Denominative Verbs of this class occur, in imitation of the Verbs
of pure verbal origin. They are formed by adding i-to to the Themes of Adjectives
or Substantives.
debUKs, weak: deb%l-ii <fe6l/-l-to, to weaken.
infelix, unhappy: infelic-is mfSRc-i'to, to render unhappy.
nobUis, noble: nobil-it nolfti-X'tOf to ennoble.
pSriclum, attempt : .
Ihponeut
,.piricl-u pifricl l-tor, to attempt.
III.
1. soOf seSre.
2. a-seof a-se^re
3. e-soOf enioSre.
4. UaeOf 1 HicSre.
Verbs with the Suffix sco, etc., are termed Inceptive* or Inchoative
Verbs. They point out the ** beginning'* of an action or state.
When derived from Verbs, they are formed by adding *co to the Theme of
primitives of the Ist, 2nd, or 4th conjugation; but in the 3rd conjugation they
are formed from the Root, between which and the Suffix the Connecting
Vowel i is inserted.
Obs. 1. All Inceptive Verbs are of the 8rd conjugation, whether they are formed from
Verbs, Substantives, or Adjectives.
Obs, 2. All Inceptive or Inchoative Verbs end in tco; yet not all Verbs that end in
SCO are of this class. The following are to be regarded as Simple Verbs formed from
their own Roots : —
addlesco, to grow up.
abdlesco, to cease.
exdlescOf '\
indlesco, >to grow old.
obsdlesco,)
cresco, to increase.
Msco, to open the mouth wide.
noscOf to become acquainted with.
pascOf to feed cattle.
quiesco, to rest
suesco, to accustom one's sel£
compesco, to restrain.
dupescOf to divide.
disco, to learn.
posco, to demand.
scisco, to order or ratify a law.
* Incipio, to begin ; inchdo, to begin.
Digitized by
Google
128 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IV.
1. ttmof to love: '. ama ama-scoy to begin to love,
consudoj to sweat 1 „,consuda,. consuda'Sco^ to begin to sweat
profusely : J profusely.
generor, to bel ....genera...... genera-scoy to begin to be pro-
produced : J duced.
Wwy to totter: ••• I ah a laba-sco, to begin to totter.
ftrCOf to be dry : are are-sco, to begin to be dry.
cdleOj to be warm : .,.eale • cale-^eo, to begin to be warm.
con^eo, to be silent : contice,,.. contice-scoj to begin to be si-
lent.
langueo, to be lan-1 langue ..,. langue-sco, to begin to be lan-
guid : J guid.
palleo, to be pale: .palle palle-sco, to begin to be pale.
rubeOy to be red : rube rube-scOy to begin to be red.
vireoy to be green: ^.,v\re vlre-scoy to begin to be green.
obdormtOy to falll ...obdormi.,, obdormi-scOy to begin to fall
asleep : J asleep.
sentxoy to perceive : ...senti senti-scoy to begin to perceive.
ft. rSmo« to sigh : gem gem-i-scOy to begin to idgh.
tremoy to tremble: trem... trem-i-sco, to begin to tremble.
Inceptive Verbs are sometimes derived from Substantives, and signify
** to begin to have" that, or to " become" that, or " like" that, which is de-
noted by such Substantives.
They are formed from the Theme of Substantives by adding to it either
G'SCOy e- scoy or i'sco; so that the Verbs seem to be formed after primitives
of the Isty 2d, or drd conjugation.
a. ptt^Uav girl: puelUce ... puelUa-scOy^ to become a pu-
ella ; t. e.\y to grow girlish.
puer, boy: .puer^i puer-a-seo, [to become &pu€r;
i. e.], to attain boyhood.
vespery evening: vesper-i vesper-a-scoy to become even-
ing.
acetuMy sour wine: ,„acet'i acH-a-scOy [to become like sour
wine], to grow sour.
gelUy ice: geUu gel-ascoy to become or turn to
ice.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IV.] y£!tfiS.---=)ieo, scCre^etc. 129
3. avtocir, tree : # , ai^bS r^u .... arbdr-e-seo, to become a tree .
aurum, gold:. aur-i aur-e-seo, [to become gold], to
grow of a gold colour.
car^o, charcoal : carbon-is,, carbon^e-scoy to become char-
eoal.
comu, horn : corn-u com-e-sco, [to become horn], to
be<;ome hard as horn.
ex, completely ; 1 .... f ear, 1 ... exaqu-e^scoy to turn completely
a^tia, water: J \aqU'4B \ to water.
herbtty a green stalk: herb-ce hefb-e-sco^ to grow into green
stalks.
juvenis, a young! .juven-is ... juven^e^sco^iohetom^'^juvenis,
person : J
Idpisy stone : ,,.,,,,.,.,Japtd'is ... laptd-e-sco, to become a stone ;
to be petrified.
>iojr, night: noct-is woc^c-*co, to T}ecome night ; to
grow dark.
j9/»ma, feather : pplum^cB plum-C'ScOy to begin to have
feathers; to be fledged.
s^lvoy wood: sylv'CB sylv-e-sco, to become wood; to
run to wood.
«. lopiiiiui, a stone: ,*.,.Japill4,.*,, Japill-i'ScOy to become a stone.
Inceptive Verbs are further derived from Adjectives, and signify to be-
come of the same quality as their primitive.
They are formed by adding to the Theme of their Adjectives a-sco,
C'SCOf OT i'sco; so that these, like such as are formed from Substantives,
seem to be formed from primitives of the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd conjugation.
2. t^ner, tender : tener-i tener-a-scoy to grow tender.
3. HmSLruMf bitter: ,.,amdr'i amdr-esco, to grow bitter.
claruSy clear: clar-i dar-e-sco, to grow clear.
dulcify sweet: dulc-is dulc'e-scOy to become sweet.
nXgery black : nigr-i nigr-e-scOy to become black.
peryYery; 1 »pery 1 ... /?crcre6r-e-*co, to become very
crebevy frequent: J crebr4j frequent.
K
Digitized by
Google
130 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IV.
♦t«, 1 in, 1 ...[»nrai«?-«-wo], 1 to become
raucuf, hoarse : J rauc'ij irrauC'C'ScOj J hoarse-
tener^ tender : tener^i tener-e-scoy to grow tender.
«• TKtiuitasy old: vetust-is,: vetust-isco, to grow old.
IV.
(tikr)-Io« (tttr)-ire.
Verbs of this class are called Desiderative Verbs. They express "a
desire" to do, etc^ somethiDg.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of the Future Parti-
ciple, and by changing the preceding long u into short tc.
06«. 1. All Desideratiye YerbB are of the 4th conjugation, and hence end in to.
Obs. 2. There are some rerbs in urio that are not Desideratives : snch are li^uHot to
lick ; prurio, to itch ; scaturto, to bubble up, &c Observe also that the u m these
words is long.
ccBno, to sup : ..canatu r-us, ccBnatur^io^ to desire to sup.
dico, to tell: dictur-us.., dictur'to, to desire to tell.
emOy to bay : emtur-tts,., emtur-w^ to desire to buy.
edoy to eat : esur-us esur-to, to desire to eat
lego, to read: lectur-us.^, lectur-ioy to desire to read.
parioy to hrmg ioTi^ :, p ar tu r'US., partur-tOy to desire to bring
forth.
The following Desideratiyes are obtained from Substantives by adding
the Suffix to the Theme of the primitive.
Squusv horse : equ^i .egthiOy to desire a hors^.
cdtultis, 1 .,,,,catul'L.,.. catul-tOy to desire a whel
a whelp : J ^ ^^^^ whelps.
V.
1. ssOf ssSre. 2. e-«so, eHMUte«. 3. Ihwo* Umm^re*
Verbs in mo, M«re, etc., express "doing" an action "eagerly," and are
termed Verbs Intensive.
* Irraueeseo affords an instance of the preposition m losing its force in composi-
tion.
Digitized by
Google
Cfi. IV. ] y £BBS. — MO» Mfoe, etc. ; Uso. iMftre, etc. 131
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Verbs.,
1. lnoSdo»
to go against :
video, to see: vid [^rirf-^so], "j to see or look at
[t7t-wo], f eagerly.
1 INCED pwcerf-Mo], "1 to go eagerly
:J ince-sso, J against; to attack.
wo], 11
ro], U
^*, J
o» to take:.: cap cap-e-sso, to take or catch at
eagerly.
facioy to do : fac fac-e-ssoy to do eagerly.
LAC, akin to S. \ lac laC'C-sso, to bite eagerly f; hence,
A^/ DAC, to bite : J to provoke, exasperate, etc.
3. peto, to seek after : ... pet pet-UssoXy to seek eagerly after.
VI.
1MM»» iMftre I also, %Mmvtt tMftrl.
Verbs in isso, tssdre, etc., denote the " imitating,** or " being like," their
primitives, and may be termed Imitative Verbs. They occur in both a
Transitive and Intransitive force.
They are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of Substantives and
Adjectives.
JkttleiUf Athenian :,,,,Attt c-i, Atttc-issOy to imitate an Athe-«
nian ; Atticize.
GrcBcuSy Greek : Grac-i .,.. Grcec-isso^ to imitate a Greek ;
Graecize.
...Sicul'i [_ Siciil'isso^y 1 to imitate a Sici-
Sidl'isso, Jlian; Sicilize.
...Com-i. Com-issory to imitate Gomus;
to revel, etc.
,,.mdlac .malac'issor, to imitate softness ;
to render soft or supple.
Siculus,
Sicilian :
ComuSy KtHfiocy
Gomus, the god
of revels :
malacy akin to Gr.
^aXaM^y soft:
* The force of " to visit," belongs to vUo by metonjmy.
f Laeetao is used in this, its etymological force, in Colu
I The form pete$so is equally in use.
Lacesao is used in this, its etymological force, in Columella, 10.
use.
K 2
Digitized by
Google
1 32 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. IV.
pater^ father: .patrUs, patr-isso, to imitate or be like
a father.
trulhy trowel: truli-iB ^rw/Z-mo, to fmitate trowelling ;
to plaster.
VIL
The Suflixes tro, irare, etc., appear akin in origin to Ajectives in fer,
<rM, etc., and Substantives in tor, torts, etc. They denote the "doing"
or " causing ** something ; or " doing with " something.
They are formed from Roots ; or from the Themes of Substantives.
1. MBdOf 1 ••«...C£D rc€Bd-tro'
to cut : J icaS'trd
COS' tro,
A. ^/ PBV» within : PEN pen-e-tro^ [to make within], to
penetrate.
3. ealx, heel : ^...calc'is calc-t-tro, £to do with the heel^,
to kick.
VIII.
1. lo, l&re. a. U-Io, U-l&re.
Verbs of this class are termed Diminutive Verbs. They mostly
signify to do something "in a slight*' or "insignificant manner,*' or "in
a slight degree." Sometimes the diminutive force is hardly to be traced.
They are formied by adding the SuflGlx to the Theme of their primitives.
Obs. 1. All Diminutive Verbs are of the Ist conjugation.
068. 2. The part of ^lie Suffix which imparts the diminutive force is the letter I; o is
the termmation belon^ug to the Verb ; t is a Connecting Vowel ; and for the purpose
of euphony, and of lengthening the p^nultima, / is doubled : i-U-o,
N,B, Compare CA. I. No. XVI.
1. f doiilo, \ FOCtTL \Jbcul'lQ\ 1 to cherish.
to cherish : J fociUo, |
2. eonseribo, to write :...CONSORIB.... conscrtb-illo, to scribble,
canto, to sing: cant cant-illo, to sing in an under-
tone.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Ch. IV.] VEBBS.— oOf oAte, etc. 133
murmuro, to murmur :..murmub.. . . . mvrrjfur'Uloy to murmur a little.
sorbeOy to sup up :•••... sobb,.. sorbMlo^ to sip up.
Ol8. 3. Fentulo ** to fan,'* ^C'f is obtained firom ventulus, *< a slight wind.*' See above,
p. 120.
IX.
OF VARIOUS VERBAL SUFFIXES.
Besides the Verbal Suffixes mentioned in iVo<. L~-.VIIL, others are
found to which an etymological meaning cannot be assigned with any cer-
tainty. They seem either to supply collateral forms to Verbs with other
Suffixes, or merely to impart a Verbal power to their Base. The difficulty
here arises from having to deal with a language that is known to us only
through writings, and those forming but a portion of a larger number of
works. In these^it is not to be expected that all the words of the whole lan-
guage should be employed. Base-forms, it is but reasonable to suppose, have
in many instances not come down to us, especially those which belong to
every-day life. Hence arises an obscurity as to formations, which would
probably be cleared up, had we but the power of listening to what th^
Romans said, in addition to our means of studying, in some m^as.ure, what
they wrote.
A'
1. coy cftre, or oor* oftrl. a. I-oo, Y-eftre. .
Verbs of this class are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of
Verbs, or to the Theme of Substantives or Adjectives.
1. alter* I alter'tus aUet'COy 1[jto do something
other : j alter-cor*, J with another ;
hence, of conversation], to
talk, etc, with another ; to
debate.
2. allmft, white. :•••«.... a Z6-t alb^uco, to make white, whiten.
communisycommon ixommu n-is ... commun- t-co, to make common,
share, etc,
niger, black : .nigr-i nigr-t-co, to mal^e black,
blacken.
* The meaning of '* to quarrel," etc., is an especial force of this verb.
k'3
Digitized by
Google
134 LATIN SUFFIXES; [Ch. IV.
fodiOy to dig : fod fod-t-co^ to dig.
mordeoj to bite : hord mordi'COf'l to bite.
99 n »> morS'i'COf J
veUOf to pluck: yell vell'-i-co^ to pluck.
AibeOf to be white: ..alb alb-i-co, to be white.
candeOf to be glit- \ c and cand-t-co^ to be glittering
tering white : J white.
elaudeo, to be lame :.claud claud^Uco, to be lame.
nigreOy to be black :.nigr nigr-i-co, to be black.
varusy bow-legged :.var4 var-t-^o, to be bow-legged.
B.
1. cYiiory clnftri. 2. l-«Iii9r, 1-elaftH.
Verbs of this class are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of
Substantives, or to a foreign word.
1. leno, 1 lenon-is [knon-cinor}^ 1 to pander.
pander : J ieno-cinory J
to protect.
patronuSf 1 patron^i ....[^patron-'etnor'],
protector : J patro'Cinor^
sermo, 1 sermon^is ..»J[sermon'e%nor]y
to converse.
conversation : J «er»io-ct«or*,
mantis = 6r. 1 mantis mantis-cinory to prophes
fjLayriQy prophet : J
a. vatesp prophet : va t-is vat-t ctnovy to prophesy.
c.
1. olto, citftre. 2. l-olto, 1-oYtftre.
Verbs in cito, citare^ etc , are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme
of Substantives and Adjectives.
1. oa, 1 or4s [or-ci/o], 1 to gape.
mouth : J os-cttOy J
* Sermonari rtaticius videtur, sed rectius: sermocinari crebrhts est, sedcor-
nqOiuSf Gellins, 17, 2, 17.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. IV.] VEBBS. — *-lo, tt-lftre, etc.; rop rftre, etc. 135
a. febrls, fever : .febr-is febr-t'cUo, to be feverish.
clarusj distinct: clar^i clar-ucito, to summon dis-
tinctlj.
D.
tt-lOf tt-lftr»f or tt-lorv tt-lftri. -
Verbs of this class are formed by adding the Suffix to the Theme of
Substantives and Adjectives ; or, immediately, to Adverbs.
lutum, mud : lut-i lut-u-loy to bespatter with mud.
ei = heU ah! ej ej-u-lo *, to exclaim ei, or ah !
^ra/M«, pleasing : grat-i grat-u-lovy to say what is
pleasing ; to congratulate.
06«. Bubulo, ** to hoot" (as an owl), is formed from bubuius, <<an owl ;" so nidtUor,
<< to build a nest," from nidului, ** a little nest ;" and others in the same way.
E.
Verbs of this class are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root of Verbs
or the Theme of Substantives.
1. rjkach akin to 6r. 1 flag ftag-rOy to burn or blaze.
*AEr, a/ of ^Xiyw, \
to burn : J
a. blatlo, to babble: blat blae-e-rOf to babble.
con, together, "1 ...consid consid-e-ro, [to see together (in
sidf akin to Gr. lA, the mind)], to review in the
V of €i^w, obsol., I mind, consider.
to see :
dcy augmentative, '
sidf akin to Gr. I A,
>v/ of €t^w, obsol.,
to see :
recipioy 1 begip recip-e^o^ 1 [to take back],
..DESm desid-e-ro, [to look at greatly
-or eagerly], to desire.
"I RECtP recip-e'TOj 1 |
to take back : J recup-e-roj J i
TOL, akin to S. 1 tol toUe-rOy to bear.
a/ tul, to bear: J
modus, measure : ,,,,..mod'i. mod'S'rory to set a measure.
• Also, Transitively, "to bewail."
K 4
Digitized by
Google
136 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ca. V.
P.
too, Inftre.
Verbs of this class are formed by adding the Suffix to the Root.
LANC, akin to S. 1 ...lane kmcrimf to tear, to rend.
V' DANC, to bite
J
CHAPTEB V.
SUFFIXES OF ADVERBS.
I.
1. e a. c.
Adverbs In e point out " the way " or " manner " in which the person or
thing denoted by the primitive " acts " or " is affected."
They are formed from Adjectives, and Participial Adjectives^ by adding
the Suffix to the Theme of their primitives.
Obs. 1. In forming the Adverbs from Adjectives in er, it must be observed whether or
not the « is retained in the obliqae cases : thus ieger, agri, makes <Bgre; but liber, lib^i,
makes libSre.
1. altas, high: alt^i.. cUt-e, highly; on high.
modestus, moderate :.. .modes ("i... modest-iy moderately.
sanusy sound : sdU't sdn-e, soundly.
vdlidus, strong : valid-i vaiid-e, 1 strongly*
*vald'^, J
<»^er, ill: <£grU agr-iyilK
j9ti/oer, beautiful : pulcr-i ... />tt/cr-e, beautifully.
/t6«r, free: ••• libev-i...... lH^r-e^ tveieiy.
tener, tender : .* tener-i ... tener'iy tenderly.
doctus, learned: doct^i doct'i, learnedly.
orndtusy orn ate : orndUi . • • orndt-e^ ornately.
* The form vakU is used in a derived forces viz., ipightily, greatly.
Digitized by
Google
Ch. v.] adverbs. — C, etc 137
a. mainf, bad/. .mdl'U maUe, badly.
henus *, good : be n-t ben^e^ well.
ijifernus, 1 infern-i ... infem^iy beneath.
that is beneath: J
supemm^ 1 sup e r w-« .^ , supern-Sy above.
that is above : J
11.
1. 9h a* nil. S. vin. 4. o.
Some Neuter Adjectives of the Accusative Singular, and some also of the
Ablative Singular, are used as Adverbs. These also point out the ^' way **
or ^* manner ** in which the person or thing denoted by the primitive is
affected.
1. dlffXollis, difficult : difficile, with difficulty.
/actlisy easy: factl-e, easily.
impuniSj nn^nmshed : imj9t2n-e, with impunity.
stiblimiSy aloft : sublim'Sy lo^ily.
2. reoensy recent : . . . . . •• • recens, recently. *
3. oetSmSf other : ceterum, thekt which relates to
the other.
multus, much: muliumy much^
n imius, excessive : mmtumf excessively.
paulusy little : patdum, a little ; somewhat.
plerusque, very many : plerumque, for the most part.
poHsstmtiSy chief: potisstmum^ chiefly.
primus, first: jvrmt^m, firstly; in the first
place.
secundus, secpnd : . • • .^ secundum^ secondly \ ; in the
second place.
tertmSy third : ». tertmmy for the third time.
quartuSy fourth : quartum, for the fourth time.
4. aroftanih secret ; .. * . . , ^ arcdnoy secretly.
cttus, quick: citOy quickly.
* Obsolete fotu^ of bonwk t ^^ this meaning very rare.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
138 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch, V.
conitnuusy contiauoos: eoit^nuo, (continuouslj) ; forth-
with (of time).
creber^ frequent : cre^ro, frequentlj.
falsuSf false: /also, falselj.
graiuUuSy gmtnitous I .•....••• ^ra^tto, gratuitously.
liquiduSj clear: RquidOy clearly.
maTtt/e^/uf, manifest : maitt^^to, manifestly.
necessariusy necessary : necessdriOf necessarily.
perpetuusy perpetual : perpetuo, perpetually.
precdrius, obtained by entreaty:... precdrio, by entreaty.
rorM*, rare : raro, rarely.
seriuSy serious: serto, seriously.
auspicdiuSf fortunate: auspicdto, at a fortunate time.
consulius, deliberated upon : consulio, deliberately.
c/trec/ii«, direct : directo^ direcdj.
tterdtuSf done again, or a second 1 tterdto, again ; once more.
time : J
merttuSy deserved I merino, deservedly.
^ optdtus, wished : optdtOy according to one's wish.
pr€BpardtU8y prepared : prapardto, preparedly.
III.
1. ter. 2. 1-ter.
Adverbs in/er, Wer, signify the "way" or "manner" in which the person
or thing denoted by the primitive ** acts " or ** is affected."
They are formed from Adjectives following the drd declension. Such as
have their Theme ending in ^ preceded by a consonant (1) reject the final
t of their Theme, and then take immediately the Suffix. But such as have
their Theme ending in any other way (2) mostly take the Connecting Vowel
f immediately after the Theme before the Suffix.
1. amaiui, fond : am an t-U [amafU''ter]y 1 fondly.
aman^ter, J
convenlensy suitable :.,, conve' 1... [c<mvemenUter\y 1 suitably.
nient^is j convenien'ter, J
eleganSy tasteful : e leg a n t-is, . • . [elegant'ter]^ 1 tastefully.
elegari'tery J
y Google
Digitized by >
Ch. v.]
ADVERBS. — ter? X-ter.
139
sapiens, wise : sapien t'is .... [sapient^Ur], 1 wisely.
sapien-tery J
sailers, skilful : sollert-is \_solert'ter], 1 skilfully.
soler-ter, J
"vtdlens, violent : v%6lent''%s..,,\y%6lent'ter], 1 violently.
violen-ter, J
2. aeer» sharp:... acr-is acr-l-ter, sharply.
audax, bold :••• auddc-is audaC't-ter, boldly.*
ce/^r, swift: celer-is cc/er-t-^tr, swiftly.
concorSy concordant :...c onco rd'is,. . concord-t-ter, concordantly.
felix, happy : .felt c-is feliC'i-ter, happily.
ferox, fierce : .feroc-is feroc-p-ter, fiercely.
gravis, heavy: graves grav-uter, heavily.
hilaris, cheerful : htla r^is ktlar-uter^ cheerfully.
par, equal: .partis par-t-ier, equally.
saluber, healthful : .,,salub r-is salubr-i-ter, healthfully .
simplex, simple : si mp lic^is, . . . simpltC't-ter, simply.
uHlis, useful : ut tl-is utU-Uter, usefully.
Obs, Some Adverbs in tevt i-tery are found which apparently belong to Adjectives in
us, i. e. which follow the 2nd declension. It is most probable, however, that they are
formed from Adjectives following the 8rd declension, which have not come down to us
in the written language. On the same principle must be explained the occurrence of
adverbs in e, belonging to adjectives which follow the drd declension, thus : —
[/mtM/uZens], ) fraudulent; ... [/rai«ft«&n*-M],)[/?'aiMitt/en*-ter],) fraudulently.
fraudulmtw,
{temuUns],
temuUntus,
[mtserw],
miser J
[jpr€hU\
probus,
IsanW],
} Jraudulent'i,
) drunken: [^temuknt-is'],
/ temtdent-i,
) wretched: [tomct-m],
f miaer-i,
) excellent: [/>ro6-i»],
j proh'%,
) discreet: [fan-M],
j sau'i.
) fraudvlen'ter, f
) Itemulent'ter'ii
j temtden-ter,
miser-X'ter,
nu8er'€.
}
) prob-%-ter,
j prob'if
) san-l'ter,
J san-e,
} drunkenly.
) wretchedly.
) excellently.
) discreetly.
In the same way the construction of the following may be explained, though only the
adjectival form us is found : durus, hard, durif durtter, hardly ; firmus, nrm, firme,
Jirmiter, firmly ; humanus, human, humanef hunumtter, humanly ; laraus, abundant, large,
lar0ter, abundantly ; lucidentus, excellent, luctUente, luculenter, excellently ; turbtUentuSy
turbulent, turbuiente, turbtdenter, turbulently.
* ^vc2ac-^, without the Connecting Vowel I, is the form more commonly found in
Classical Latin.
Digitized by
Google
140 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Cb. V.
IV.
%• tns*. a. i-tos.
Adverbs in tuSt &c., point out, properly, "whence" any person or^ thing
comes ; and hence, in a derived force, they denote " origin " and also
" result."
When derived from Prepositions, the Suffix is added immediately to such
Prepositions. But when they are derived from Adjectives or Substantives,
they are formed from the Theme of such Adjectives or Substantives, between
which and the Suffix the Connecting Vowel i is introduced.
!• tB, inside: iti'tus, from the inside*
sub, beneath: sub^tus, from beneath.
a. aatlqans, ancient : ,,,antiqu'i„. antiqu-t'tus, [from what is an-
cient], from ancient times.
divinus, divine:....... ...rfi>iw-t ... divin-i'tus, [from what is di-
vine], from heaven.
humanus,humvji:^,,.,human'i.„ human't-tuSf [from what is
huoian], humanly.
cos/um, heaven : ccel'-i <7(»Z*t-^«, from heaven.
medulla, marrow : medulUce.. medull't-tus, from the marrow ;
iinwardly.
radix, root : radiC'is .,. radic-i-ius, from the root.
sHrps, root: stirp-is ... stirp-utus^ from the root, ut-
terly.
Ohs, To this class must probably be refeixed the Adverb igitur-; as fur b tus, appa-
rently.
I, (pronomioalroot), this:.... i Ug-i-tur^ from this (cause, etcS),
therefore, hence, etc.
V.
les.
Adverbs in X^es, formed f^om Ordinal Adjectives, denote " so many times*'
as the primitive represents : as, quinqtte, five ; quinqnies, five times.
* Compare the hardening of the vowel by c m hie, the asperated form of i-c.
Digitized by VjOOQ iC
Ch.V.] adverbs.— ^••^tlm, etc. 141
They are formed from such as end in «, t, o, or m preceded by a vowel,
by eliding «, or t, or o, or m with its vowel, and then adding the Suffix. But
in such as are derived from Ordinals in inti or mto, the Suffix is added to
what remains, as a Base, after the irUi or irUa has been thrown off.
quinqu'e, five : quinqu'tes, five times.
seXySix: , ,... «ea?-te«, six times.
sept-emy seven : sept-Usy seven times.
oct-o, eight: ocZ-ie^, eight times.
^ot;-em, nine: nov-te^, nine times.
dec'cm, ten : ....•> dec-ieSy ten times.
undec-iniy eleven- : undec'tes, eleven times.
duodec^imy twelve : dtiodec-iesy twelve times.
tredec- im, thirteen : tredec'tes, thirteen times.
cent'Um, hundred : cent'teis, hundred times.
dtecent4y two hundred : dttcent-tes, two hundred times.
mill-e, thousand : mill-ies, thousand times.
vig-intiy twenty : , [r«^-tc»], 1 twenty times.
vic'ies, J
trig-intay thirty : . .- [#r^-f «], 1 thirty times.
tric'tes, J
quadrcig'inta, forty : quadrdg^tes, forty times.
quinquag-intay fifty : quinquag-USy fifty times.
sexag-intay sixty: sexdg-teSy sixty times.
septuag-intay seventy: septuag-teSy seventy times.
octog-inta 1 eighty: octog_^teSy l^jhty times.
nonag-intay ninety : nonag- tes, ninety times.
VI.
1. tlin. 2* Sim. S. ft-ttin. 4. 1-ttliii. 6. fL^lm.
Adverbs in tiniy etc., denote the " way " or " manner " in which a person or
thing "acts'* or "is affected."
When derived from Verbs, they are formed by adding the Suffix to the
Theme of the 1st Conjugation, but mostly to the Root in the other Conju-
gations. When derived from Adjectives, or Substantives, they are formed
by adding the Suffix to the Theme.
Obs. 1. The Primary Suffix appears to be ti, of which ti-m would be the Accusative
form in Substantives. It is probable, therefore, that Adverbs in tim, whether derived
Digitized by
Google
142 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Gh. V.
from Verbs, Adjectiyes, or SabsUutives, are Adverbial Accusatives of Abstract Nouns
oo longer in use. Some few Substantives in tie exist; and these have properly an
abstract force : viz., iementiM, a seeding ; meint, a mowing. See p. 102.
Obs. 2. In order to express as nearly as possible the original force of the adverbs in
Hm, etc, an assumed English participle has been employed for the purpose, as given in
several cases within the square brackets; e,g, [by a trooping], [by a squadroning],
etc., etc.
1. eito. to speed : cita cUa-Hm^ [by a speeding],
qnickljr.
cuneo, to form like al ct^nea cuned-Hm, [by a formiDg like
wedge: J a wedge], wedge-formed or
shaped.
gravOi to load : grava gravd-tiniy [by a loading], with
difficulty.
^r^^o, to collect into! ^re^^a grega-tim, [by a collecting
a flock : J into a flock], in flocks.
nomiTWy to name : nomtna,.,, nomtnd'timy [by a naming], by
name.
sepdroy to separate: „.separd,.,.. sepdrd'tim^ [by a separating],
separately.
jf0, to stand: • std std-tim^ [by or in a standing],
by or in standing ; also,
forthwith,
mmuo, to lessen : minu ...... mtnu-Hmy [by a lessening],
minutely.
carpo, to pluck : carp carp-Hmy [by a plucking], by
pieces, piece by piece.
conjungo, to unite : ...conjung ....[con/ttw^-Ziw], 1 [by a uniting],
conjunc'tiniy J unitedly.
contemnoy to despise: contem contem-tim, ["[with a despis-
contemp'timy i ing], with con-
t tempt.
prcBy before ; 1 prjeser pr€Bser'tim, [by an arranging
sero, to arrange : J before], especially.
/)MW^o, to puncture :...PUNG [_pung'tim]j^ [bj a punctur-
punc'tiniy I ing], with the
I point; by stab-
bing,
by a 1
stric-Hmy J ing], closely.
>y to draw : trag [/ra^-ft'm], I [by a drawing],
trac'timy > little by little;
5^rt«^o, to draw tight : strig [^^n^-fow], 1 [by a tight draw
c-Hmy J ing],
traho^
trac'timy
J by degrees.
Digitized by
Google
Ch.V.]
con, together;
ferOy to bring :
pes, foot;
tendo, to stretch :
ADVERBS. — tkB^ etc.
..con-FEB.
143
confer'tim, [bjabringlDg to-
gether], closely, compactly.
.,m,ped'ts, 1 ...[ped'C'tend'tim^y 1 [by a foot-
TEND J ped-e'ten-tim, I stretching],
j foot by foot;
J slowly.
uber, abundant: uber-is uber^Hm, [by a being abund-
ant], abundantly.
singuluSy single: singul'i,.,*Mngul'Hmy [by a being single],
one by one ; singly.
furtum, "1 ...../ttr/-t [yttr^ft'm], "j [by a secret act-
J fuT'Hmy > ing], by stealth ;
J secretly.
secret action :
2. oaed^v
to cut :
curro,
to run :
mUceo,
to mix :
PAD (Sanscrit
root), to go :
senttOy
to observe :
}
, QXD \c(Bd'-tim\ "
c<B8~tiin\
\c(BS'Siin\y
ctB'Sim, ^
...CUR [c«r-«m], '
cur'Sim,
...Misc [mwc-ft'm], 1 [by a mixing],
^miS'tim, J mixedly.
...PAD [pad-Hm\ 1 [by agoing], hither
}j)€iS'tim}y f and thither ; here
[by a cutting], with
the edge ; by
striking.
[by a running],
quickly; swiftly.
}
passim, J and there.
. SENT [sent'timl,
[senS'Sim],
seri'Sim,
[by an observing],
gradually (t. e, so
that a thing is per-
> ceived beforehand,
and does not come
unexpectedly on
one).
3. minfitas, minute : ...minut-i minut'd'tim, [by a being made
small], in little pieces.
pai///M«, little : .paulUL pauU-a-Hm, [by a being little],
little by little.
paullulus, very little: paullul-i,,, paullul-a-tim, [by a being very
little], very little by very
little.
* Sometimes formed singtdatm; see below, No, 8.
t Also, by transposition of $e (cfisx), mixtim.
Digitized by
Google
144 LATIN SUFFIXES. [Ch. V.
sinffiUus, single: .. ,.,,,8 ingu 14,., *singul'd-iwn^[hjtLheing single},
one by one; singly.
ca^tfroa, a troop : caterV'€B.., caterv-a-tim^ [by a trooping],
by troops, in companies.
^tffiK^, class : yener4s .,, gSner-a'tim, [by a claiming],
by classes, kinds, or species.
grMuSyBtei^:,..* .grad-us .o grad-a-timy [by a Stepping],
step by step ; gradually.
oppidumy^\(j^n\,,^,„opp%d''i ... oppid-a-Hmy [by a towning],
town by tow^.
ostium^ a door : ostUi ostt-a-iifn, [by a dooring], from
door to door.
promncuiy province:... pro- 1 ... provinct-d'-timy [by a provinc-
vinct-^j ing], province by province.
summa, io]^: summ'iB ,,, summ-d-Hmy [by a topping],
slightly.
/urma, squadron : turm^tB ... turm-d-tmy [by a squadron-
ing], by or in squadrons.
rtctif, street : vic'i vic'd'tim, [by a streeting],
from street to street.
*. TlTf man : ... ,„,.., „,.,v Ir^t.k vir-t'timy [by a itoatining],
man by man.
6. trYbtiSy a tribe : trib-us trib-u-timy [by a tribing],
tribe by tribe.
(^8. 3. AffXH^ is compounded of ad and fiUim (fatim itself being the adverbial
accusative of the obsolete futis) ; fatim enim abundanter dicimus, unde et affa tint, Serv.
Virg. M, 1, 123.
* Sometimes formed svngultim: see above, No, 1. It is also corrupted into nngilla-
tvn; and thence is obtained ttgUmtim.
THE END.
LONDON :
PRINTED BT SPOTTISWOODB AND CO.
NEW-STRBBT SQUARE.
Digitized by
Google
1
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
•^
oogle
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11